JP6850675B2 - Game machines and game equipment - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine and a game device.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot is provided with a plurality of reels in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game medium such as a medal is inserted into the game machine, and starts the rotation of all reels. Output the requested signal. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. To do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a game machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols.

Further, such a game machine is provided with a medal selector for detecting a medal inserted at the tip of the medal insertion slot. In addition, for this medal selector, a medal that is not a proper medal (regular medal) (illegal medal) is inserted into the medal slot, or an instrument is inserted into the medal slot to insert a regular medal into the game machine. Measures have been taken against fraudulent acts in which the game is played by mistaking it as being thrown.

For example, Patent Document 1 describes a slot machine that uses a CCD camera to determine an inappropriate medal (illegal medal) that has been inserted.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-271462

In a game machine such as the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, in the case of fraudulent acts related to an imaging unit equipped with a CCD camera, restarting (rebooting) one of the imaging unit and various units connected to the imaging unit is performed. There is cheating with. However, with the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, it is difficult to recognize a fraudulent act involving a restart.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine and a game device capable of recognizing fraudulent acts accompanied by restart.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides a game machine and a game device having the following configurations.

Display means for displaying various images (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
Control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101 described later) and
An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
Passing object detecting means (for example, camera unit 209 described later) for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
A game medium determination means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on data obtained via the passing object detection means is provided. ,
The game medium determination means is
A command transmission means for transmitting various commands to the control means, and
It has a transmission command number counting means for cumulatively counting the number of commands transmitted to the control means after activation.
The various commands include an ACK command indicating that the command was normally received when a predetermined command was received from the control means.
The command transmitting means transmits the various commands transmitted to the control means, including count information indicating the value of the count cumulatively counted by the transmission command number counting means.
The control means
A count information storage means (for example, a sub-RAM 103 described later) for storing the count information included in the various received commands, and
The value obtained by adding 1 to the count information included in the previously received count information stored by the count information storage means and the value indicated by the count information included in the various commands received this time match. It has a determination means (for example, sub CPU 102 described later) for determining whether or not to perform
A gaming machine characterized in that when it is determined that the determination means do not match, an abnormality is notified by the display means.

Control means and
A game medium detection means for detecting a game medium is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
Passing object detecting means for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
A game medium determining means for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a legitimate game medium based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means is provided.
The game medium determination means is
A command transmission means for transmitting various commands to the control means, and
It has a transmission command number counting means for cumulatively counting the number of commands transmitted to the control means after activation.
The various commands include an ACK command indicating that the command was normally received when a predetermined command was received from the control means.
The command transmitting means transmits the various commands transmitted to the control means, including count information indicating the value of the count cumulatively counted by the transmission command number counting means.
The control means
A count information storage means for storing the count information included in the various received commands, and a count information storage means.
The value obtained by adding 1 to the count information included in the previously received count information stored by the count information storage means and the value indicated by the count information included in the various commands received this time match. It has a determination means for determining whether or not to do so, and has
A gaming device characterized in that when it is determined that the determination means do not match, an abnormality is notified.

According to the present invention, fraudulent activity involving restart can be recognized.

It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance composition example in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It shows the internal structure in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention, and is the perspective view in the state which the middle door is closed. It shows the internal structure in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention, and is the perspective view in the state which the middle door is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the inside of the cabinet in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the back surface side of the front door in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the medal selector in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention seen from the oblique rear of the gaming machine. It is an exploded view of the medal selector in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the medal selector in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention seen from the oblique front of the gaming machine. It is a rear view of the base plate part of the medal selector in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view of the select plate of the medal selector in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the path of the medal when the medal selector in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of the invention guides a medal to a hopper device. It is a figure which shows the path of the medal when the medal selector in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention guides a medal to a medal shoot. It is a block diagram which shows the control system in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the main control circuit in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the auxiliary control circuit in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the medal selector in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the control LSI in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the distortion of the lens in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the projection conversion processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention, A shows the RGB Bayer image before projection conversion, and B shows the RGB Bayer image after projection conversion. It is a figure for demonstrating the threshold graph in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 1) for demonstrating the determination area in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 2) for demonstrating the determination area in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 3) for demonstrating the determination area in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 4) for demonstrating the determination area in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the determination area determination result data stored in SRAM in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the medal count determination table in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the Gaussian filter in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the circular area detection process in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating 3σ correction processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the filter processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention, A shows typically the circular area image data after 3σ correction processing, B shows the coefficient for edge image X, and it shows. C indicates a coefficient for edge image Y. It is a figure which shows an example of the regular medal used for the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention, A shows one side of the regular medal, B shows the gradient average image data of the regular medal. It is a figure for demonstrating the HOG conversion process in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the FFT conversion process in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart of the process performed by the control LSI in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 1) which shows an example of the template generation processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the template generation processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of this template update process in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the coefficient update process in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the threshold plane in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a list of the command sent and received between the medal selector and the sub-control circuit in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the command transmission / reception sequence between a medal selector and a sub-control circuit in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving a non-operation command in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the medal selector communication task in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the medal selector command reception processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of receiving the activation completion command in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the initialization error screen in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the selector switch error screen in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of receiving the determination completion command in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the cue provided in the sub-RAM 103 in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the C2 error screen in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving a medal selector error command in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the C1 error screen in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving the medal selector non-operation command in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the activation count determination processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch state determination processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of receiving a medal insertion command in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the medal selector command transmission processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the error cancellation determination processing in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the error information history screen in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the medal selector in the game machine of the modification 1 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the medal selector in the game machine of the modification 2 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the control LSI in the game machine of the modification 2 of this invention. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the selector monitoring function in the game machine of the modification 3 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the medal selector in the game machine of the modification 4 of this invention. It is a rear view of the medal selector in the game machine of the modification 5 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the medal selector in the game machine of the modification 5 of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the medal selector in the game machine of the modification 6 of this invention. It is a top view of the game apparatus which concerns on application example 1 of the Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of the game apparatus which concerns on application example 2 of the Embodiment of this invention. It is sectional drawing of the hopper for counting which concerns on application example 2 of embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the example of the internal structure of the gaming apparatus which concerns on application example 3 of the Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine, which is a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 69.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG.
In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium.

When a medal is inserted by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from a random number in a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. The main control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for this internal lottery means. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, re-game operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and those related to other so-called "loss". Is provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is carried by a main control circuit described later.

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set for 1 symbol.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols within the specified time of 190 msec (4 frames of the symbols) on the winning determination line. Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along. Further, the reel stop control means is specified for one or more reels, for example, when the challenge bonus (CB) which is a second type special accessory and the middle bonus (MB) which continuously operates the CB are operated. Within the time of 75 msec (for one symbol), the rotation of the reel is stopped so that the combination of the symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line. Further, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to rotate the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop it.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. The winning determination means is carried by the main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that the prize is related to the prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game.

Further, in pachislot, in the series of flows described above, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various productions are performed.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter referred to as a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. A sub-control circuit, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. In this way, in pachislot, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 in one embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 6.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a for accommodating a hopper device 51 and a medal auxiliary storage 52 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, and a front door 2b that can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet 2a.
Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one side handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess for carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

Inside the exterior body 2, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 20) patterns are drawn at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a liquid crystal display device 11 showing a specific example of the display device.

The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown), and opens and closes the opening of the cabinet 2a. The hinge is provided at the left end portion of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachislot machine 1. The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a, and the liquid crystal display device 11 is used to perform an effect of displaying an image.

The front panel 10 is arranged so as to be superimposed on the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and is formed in a frame shape having a panel opening 10a that exposes the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11. A lamp group 18 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 18 is composed of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect.

A pedestal portion 12 is formed in the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with a symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player.

The symbol display area 4 is arranged on the front side of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R so as to be superimposed on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration capable of transmitting the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the display window 4. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped, among the plurality of types of symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the upper, middle, and lower stages in the frame thereof. One symbol (three in total) is displayed in each area of. In the present embodiment, a pseudo line formed by combining any of three predetermined areas of the upper, middle, and lower stages of the reel display window 4 is used to determine whether or not a prize is won. It is defined as a line (winning judgment line).

The reel display window 4 is formed by a frame member 13 provided on the pedestal portion 12. The frame member 13 has a reel display window 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button mounting portion 15.

The information display window 14 is continuously provided at the lower part of the reel display window 4 and opens upward. That is, the reel display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. The information display window 14 and the reel display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16.

The window cover 16 is arranged on the inner surface side of the frame member 13 and cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b. Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet mounting portion 17 facing the opening of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. A seat member (information sheet) on which information about the game is described is arranged between the seat mounting portion 17 and the window cover 16. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with a window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps.

Since the window cover 16 constituting the information sheet mounting portion is not removable from the front side of the front door 2b and has a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps, the pachislot machine 1 can be used by using the information sheet mounting portion. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities that access the inside of the door.

The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14, and is formed on a flat surface facing the front. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with a through hole through which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R penetrate. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are associated with each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and are provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R show an example of various devices to be operated by the player. Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a medal insertion slot 21, a BET button 22, a start lever 23, a SELECT button 28, and an enter button 29 as various devices to be operated by the player.

The medal slot 21 is provided to receive medals dropped from the outside by the player. The medals accepted in the medal slot 21 will be inserted into one game up to a predetermined number (for example, 3), and the excess will be deposited inside the pachislot 1. It becomes possible (so-called credit function).

The BET button 22 is provided to determine the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to be inserted into one game. The start lever 23 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

Further, a 7-segment display 24 composed of a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when the front door 2b is viewed from the front. The 7-segment display 24 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out) and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot (hereinafter, the number of credits). ..

A settlement button 27 is provided on the left side of the pedestal portion 12 when the front door 2b is viewed from the front. The settlement button 27 is provided for pulling out (discharging) to the outside stored inside the pachislot machine 1. A lumbar panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal portion 12. The lumbar panel unit 31 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

Below the lumbar panel unit 31, a medal payout outlet 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout outlet 32 guides the medals discharged from the medal selector 201 described later and the medals discharged by driving the hopper device 51 described later to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 32 are stored in the medal tray unit 34. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output sound effects, music, and the like according to the content of the production.

[Internal structure]
3 and 4 are perspective views showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 provided on the back surface side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. Further, FIG. 4 shows a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b.
Further, FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the inside of the cabinet 2a. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view showing the back surface side of the front door 2b.

The cabinet 2a has a top plate 20a, a bottom plate 20b, left and right side plates 20c and 20d, and a back plate 20e (see FIG. 5). A cabinet-side speaker 42 is arranged on the upper side inside the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side speaker 42 is attached to the back plate 20e of the cabinet 2a via the mounting brackets 43L and 43R. The cabinet-side speaker 42 is, for example, a speaker for outputting a sound effect.

When the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, the cabinet-side relay board 44 is arranged on the left side of the cabinet-side speaker 42. The cabinet-side relay board 44 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 14), which will be described later, attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch (not shown), and a medal payout. Relays the wiring that connects to the count switch (not shown).

An amplifier board 45 for controlling the sound output by the cabinet-side speaker 42 is arranged in the central portion inside the cabinet 2a. The amplifier board 45 is attached to a mounting shelf 46 fixed to the left and right side plates 20c and 20d.

Further, when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, an external centralized terminal plate 47 is arranged on the right side of the amplifier board 45 (see FIG. 5). The external centralized terminal plate 47 is attached to the right side plate 20d of the cabinet 2a. The external centralized terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot 1.

When the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, the sub power supply device 48 is arranged on the left side of the amplifier board 45. The sub power supply device 48 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The sub power supply device 48 supplies electric power having an AC voltage of 100 V to the power supply device 53 described later. Further, the power of AC voltage 100V is converted into the power of DC voltage and supplied to the amplifier board 45.

A medal payout device (hereinafter, hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged on the lower side inside the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 (storage means) is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 20b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. For example, when the settlement button 27 (see FIG. 2) is pressed and the medals deposited inside the pachislot are settled, the hopper device 51 ejects the stored medals for the number of credits. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 32 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is engaged with the bottom plate 20b of the cabinet 2a, and is configured to be removable from the bottom plate 20b.

The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side surface plate 20c. The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 14). The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device 48 into the power of the DC voltage required in each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

As shown in FIGS. 3, 4, and 6, the middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and the reel display window 4 (see FIG. 4) can be opened and closed from the back side. Door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c are provided on the upper part and the lower part of the middle door 41. The door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c fix (prohibit) the opening operation of the middle door 41 in a state where the reel display window 4 is closed from the back side. That is, in order to open the middle door 41, it is necessary to rotate the door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c to release the fixing of the middle door 41.

A main control board case 55 containing a main control board 71 (see FIG. 14) and three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the middle door 41. A stepping motor is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56. This setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the setting of the pachi-slot 1 or confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1.
In the present embodiment, the main control board unit is composed of the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55.

The main control board 71 (first control unit) housed in the main control board case 55 constitutes a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 15) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and determining whether or not there is a prize. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

A sub-control board case 57 for accommodating the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 14) is disposed above the middle door 41, and a center speaker 58 is disposed above the sub-control board case 57. The sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57 constitutes the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 16). The sub-control circuit 101 (second control unit) is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 101 will be described later.

A sub-relay board 61 is arranged on the right side of the sub-control board case 57 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The sub-relay board 61 relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71. Further, it is a board that relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and the boards arranged around the sub-control board 72. Examples of the substrate arranged around the sub-control substrate 72 include LED substrates 62A, 62B, and 62C, which will be described later.

The LED substrates 62A, 62B, and 62C are arranged on both sides of the sub-control substrate case 57 when viewed from the back surface side of the front door 2b. These LED substrates 62A, 62B, 62C are a plurality of LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) 85 (see FIG. 14) showing a specific example of a light source according to the effect executed by the control of the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 16). ) Is emitted to display the blinking pattern. The pachislot 1 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of LED substrates in addition to the LED substrates 62A, 62B, 62C.

A 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 is arranged below the sub-relay board 61. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history of the front door 2b. Further, when the front door 2b is opened, a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 is output to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101).

A board speaker 64 and lower speakers 65L and 65R are arranged below the middle door 41. The board speaker 64 faces the lumbar panel unit 31 (see FIG. 2), and the lower speakers 65L and 65R face the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

A medal selector 201, a medal chute 202, and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are arranged above the lower speaker 65L. The medal selector 201 is a device for determining whether or not the material and shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the hopper device 51 via the slope 203, or the medal. Guide to chute 202. The specific configuration of the medal selector 201 will be described later.

The medal chute 202 is a substantially Y-shaped tubular member, and guides medals guided by the medal selector 201 and medals discharged from the hopper device 51 to the medal payout outlet 32 (see FIG. 2).

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged on the left side of the medal selector 201 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot 1.

Further, a door relay terminal plate 68 is arranged below the reel display window 4 and in a region opened and closed by the middle door 41 (see FIG. 4). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 14) in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub control board 72 (see FIG. 14), a medal selector 201, and a game operation display board. It is a board that relays wiring with 81 (see FIG. 14). Examples of various buttons and switches include a BET button 22, a settlement button 27, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77 described later, a start switch 79, and the like.

<Composition of medal selector>
Next, a specific configuration of the medal selector 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 13. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the medal selector 201 viewed from diagonally rearward of the pachi-slot machine 1, showing a mode in which the cover member 240 fixed to the medal selector 201 is removed. FIG. 8 is an exploded view of the medal selector 201. FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the medal selector 201 as viewed diagonally from the front of the pachislot machine 1. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the base plate portion 204 of the medal selector 201, which will be described later. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the select plate 207 described later of the medal selector 201. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a medal path when the medal selector 201 guides the medal to the hopper device 51. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a medal path when the medal selector 201 guides the medal to the medal shoot 202. The arrows X shown in FIGS. 7 to 13 indicate the left-right direction of the pachi-slot machine 1, the arrow Y indicates the front-back direction of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the arrow Z indicates the up-down direction. Each of the medal selector 201 of the present embodiment and the medal selector 301, the medal selector 401, the medal selector 501, the medal selector 601 and the medal selector 701 and the medal selector 801 in each modification described later constitute a game medium detecting means. ..

As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the medal selector 201 includes a base plate portion 204, a sub plate 205, a cancel shooter 206, a select plate 207 (guide means), and a medal solenoid 208 (driving means, see FIG. 9). ), And a camera unit 209 (imaging means or passing object detecting means). Further, as shown in FIG. 7, a cover member 240 that covers the rear side of the pachislot 1 of the medal selector 201 in the front-rear direction is fixed to the medal selector 201. In FIG. 7, the cover member 240 removed from the medal selector 201 is shown by a broken line. The cover member 240 can be set to a closed state that covers the rear side of the pachislot 1 in the front-rear direction of the medal selector 201 and an open state that exposes the rear side of the pachislot 1.

The base plate portion 204 is a substantially plate-shaped member constituting the outer frame housing of the medal selector 201, and is molded so that both ends of the pachislot 1 in the left-right direction are bent behind the pachislot 1. The base plate portion 204 has a rear surface 204b, which is one plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction of the pachislot machine 1, and a front surface 204a (see FIG. 9), which is the other plane. A medal rail 210 (passage forming portion) is formed on the rear surface 204b so as to be recessed in front of the pachislot machine 1 and in a substantially L shape. A plurality of ridges 210a are formed on the surface of the medal rail 210.

At the upper end of the base plate portion 204, a medal entrance portion 211 for receiving a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 21 (see FIG. 2) is provided. The medals inserted into the medal selector 201 from the medal entrance portion 211 move from above to below along the medal rail 210. A medal outlet portion 204c (see FIG. 8) is provided at the lower portion of the base plate portion 204. The medal that has moved in the medal selector 201 is discharged from the medal outlet portion 204c and is housed in the hopper device 51 via the slope 203 (see FIG. 4).

A central hole 212 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a substantially intermediate position of the medal rail 210, and the end portion of the medal pressure 213 (see FIG. 8) is exposed from the central hole 212. As shown in FIG. 9, the medal pressure 213 is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 214 provided on the front surface 204a of the base plate portion 204. A coil spring 215 is attached to the shaft portion 214, and the medal pressure 213 is urged by the coil spring 215 so that the medal pressure 213 protrudes from the central hole 212.

As shown in FIG. 9, a magnet 217 is provided on the front surface 204a of the base plate portion 204. The magnet 217 attracts (magnetizes) an illegal medal that is not an appropriate material among the medals that move on the medal rail 210.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, an upper exposed hole 219 is formed in a substantially central portion of the downstream region of the medal rail 210, which penetrates in the front-rear direction and exposes the rear end portion of the after-medal pressure 218, which will be described later. .. Further, in the lower portion of the downstream region of the medal rail 210, a lower exposed hole 220 is formed which penetrates in the front-rear direction and exposes the medal stopper portion 227 described later of the select plate 207.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, six reference markers 260 are formed on the medal rail 210. The reference marker 260 is arranged in the imaging region A1 (indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 10), which is the region on the medal rail 210 imaged by the camera unit 209.

The reference marker 260 includes an upper reference marker 261 and a lower reference marker 262, and the upper reference marker 261 is arranged on the upper part of the medal rail 210 so as to be arranged in three in the left-right direction while being inclined. Further, the lower reference markers 262 are arranged below the medal rail 210 so as to be arranged in three in the left-right direction while being inclined.

The reference marker 260 includes the brightness of the pixel at the location where the reference marker 260 is formed and the brightness of the pixel at the location where the reference marker 260 is not formed in the image data of the imaging region captured by the camera unit 209. Is formed so as to differ by a predetermined value or more. In this embodiment, each reference marker 260 is formed by making a triangular hole in the medal rail 210. The form of the reference marker 260 is not limited to this, and the shape of the hole can be appropriately selected. Further, for example, the reference marker 260 may be formed by printing a figure having a color different from the ground color of the medal rail 210 on the medal rail 210.

As shown in FIG. 9, the medal solenoid 208 is a movable plate portion 208b formed in a plate shape with the solenoid main body portion 208a, and one end portion and the other end portion are supported by the solenoid main body portion 208a so as to be movable in the front-rear direction. It has. The after-medal pressure 218 is rotatably supported on the front surface 204a of the base plate portion 204. When the front end of the after medal pressure 218 is pressed rearward of the pachislot machine 1 by the movable plate portion 208b of the medal solenoid 208, the after medal pressure 218 rotates and the rear end of the after medal pressure 218 is exposed to the upper exposed hole 219 ( (See FIG. 8).

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the cancel shooter 206 is a substantially plate-shaped member, and is molded so that both ends of the pachislot 1 in the left-right direction are bent in front of the pachislot 1. The cancel shooter 206 is detachably fixed to the base plate portion 204 and covers the lower portion of the base plate portion 204 from the rear. The cancel shooter 206 guides the medal discharged without passing through the medal outlet portion 204c to the medal shoot 202 (see FIG. 4). A notch 206a notched downward in a substantially rectangular shape is formed in the upper part of the substantially central portion of the cancel shooter 206 in the left-right direction.

Further, the cancel shooter 206 is provided with a notification LED 206c. The notification LED 206c constitutes a notification means that lights and notifies that an error has occurred in the AE correction process described later. Further, an initialization switch 206d, a color switch 206e, and a marking switch 206f are provided. The initialization switch 206d is operated when resetting various settings including deletion of various templates described later. The color switch 206e is operated when switching between enabling and disabling the color determination described later. The marking switch 206f is operated when switching between enabling and disabling the marking determination described later.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the sub-plate 205 is a plate-shaped member that covers the medal rail 210 from behind. The sub-plate 205 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 221 and a shaft portion 222 provided on the upper portion of the main body portion 221. A through hole 221a penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided in a substantially central portion of the main body portion 221, and a downstream region is exposed from the substantially central portion of the medal rail 210 from the through hole 221a.

The shaft portion 222 is supported by the base plate portion 204, and the sub-plate 205 is rotatably attached to the base plate portion 204 about the shaft portion 222. A coil spring 223 is attached to the shaft portion 222. Normally, the sub-plate 205 is pressed against the base plate portion 204 by the urging force of the coil spring 223. At this time, a space through which medals can pass is formed between the sub-plate 205 and the upper portion of the medal rail 210 covered by the sub-plate 205. That is, the sub-plate 205 functions as a guide plate for passing medals.

Here, for example, when a medal jam occurs in the medal selector 201, the sub-plate 205 can be rotated against the urging force of the coil spring 223 to clear the medal jam.

As shown in FIG. 7, the select plate 207 is a member that guides medals that move in a substantially central portion of the medal rail 210 that is not covered by the sub-plate 205. As shown in FIG. 11, the select plate 207 has a substantially trapezoidal plate-shaped plate body 224 and a pair of bearing portions formed by bending both ends of the plate body 224 in the left-right direction to the front of the pachi-slot machine 1. It has 225 and. Further, a flange portion 226 formed by bending the pachislot machine 1 forward and bending the rear end portion upward is formed on the upper portion of the plate body 224. Further, one bearing portion 225 is formed with a medal stopper portion 227 extending downward.

As shown in FIG. 7, the plate main body 224 faces the substantially central portion of the medal rail 210 not covered by the sub-plate 205 in the front-rear direction of the pachi-slot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 9, the select plate 207 is rotatably supported by a shaft portion 228 provided on the front surface 204a of the base plate portion 204. A coil spring 229 is provided on the shaft portion 228, and the flange portion 226 is urged to the front of the pachi-slot machine 1. The flange portion 226 is in contact with one end of the movable plate portion 208b of the medal solenoid 208. When the medal solenoid 208 is in the ON state, the flange portion 226 is pressed against one end of the movable plate portion 208b of the medal solenoid 208 and moves to the rear of the pachi-slot machine 1 against the urging force of the coil spring 229. The rotation position of the select plate 207 at this time is referred to as a "guide position". The distance between the plate body 224 of the select plate 207 and the medal rail 210 at the guide position is set to a predetermined distance that can guide the medal to the hopper device 51 without ejecting the medal to the cancel shooter 206 side. At this time, the medal stopper portion 227 does not protrude from the lower exposed hole 220 (see FIG. 8).

Further, when the medal solenoid 208 is in the OFF state, the flange portion 226 is released from the pressure of the medal solenoid 208 and moves to the front of the pachislot 1 by the urging force of the coil spring 229. The rotation position of the select plate 207 at this time is referred to as a "discharge position". The distance between the plate body 224 of the select plate 207 and the medal rail 210 at the discharge position is set to be longer than a predetermined distance. At this time, it is pressed by the flange portion 226 that moves forward of the pachi-slot 1, and one end of the movable plate portion 208b of the medal solenoid 208 moves forward of the pachi-slot 1. Along with this, the other end of the movable plate portion 208b of the medal solenoid 208 moves to the rear of the pachislot 1 and presses the front end portion of the after medal pressure 218. As a result, the after-medal pressure 218 rotates, and the rear end portion of the after-medal pressure 218 is exposed from the upper exposed hole 219 (see FIG. 8).

The medal stopper portion 227 does not protrude from the lower exposed hole 220 (see FIG. 8) when the select plate 207 is in the guide position, and protrudes from the lower exposed hole 220 when it is in the discharge position.

As shown in FIG. 12, the select plate 207 in the guide position contacts the upper part of the moving medal when the medal moving on the medal rail 210 meets the standard dimensions, and the medal is moved to the medal outlet portion 204c (see FIG. 8). ). The medal presses the medal pressure 213 forward of the pachislot 1 when guided by the select plate 207. In FIG. 12, the sub-plate 205 of the medal selector 201 and the cancel shooter 206 are not shown.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, the select plate 207 in the ejection position is separated from the plate body 224 and the medal rail 210 even when the medal moving on the medal rail 210 meets the standard dimensions. Therefore, the medal cannot be guided to the medal exit portion 204c (see FIG. 8). Further, the medal is pushed out to the medal pressure 213, the after medal pressure 218 protruding from the upper exposed hole 219, or the medal stopper portion 227 protruding from the lower exposed hole 220, and discharged toward the cancel shooter 206. Note that, in FIG. 13, as in FIG. 12, the sub-plate 205 and the cancel shooter 206 of the medal selector 201 are not shown.

Further, in the present embodiment, the select plate 207 is normally positioned at the guide position, but under predetermined conditions (for example, when a predetermined number of medals are inserted, when an error occurs, when a game starts, etc.), the select plate 207 is positioned at the ejection position. It is positioned.

Further, when the medal moving on the medal rail 210 has a diameter smaller than the standard size, even if the select plate 207 is in the guide position, the medal is not guided by the select plate 207 and is pushed out by the medal pressure 213, and the cancel shooter 206 is used. It is discharged toward.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the camera unit 209 is composed of a first substrate 230, a second substrate 231 and a lens (not shown), and whether or not the object moving on the medal rail 210 is a regular medal. Is a unit that determines and outputs the determination result to the main control circuit 91. The first substrate 230 is provided with a CMOS image sensor 232 (see FIG. 17) and an LED 233 (see FIG. 17). The second substrate 231 is provided with a control LSI 234 (see FIG. 17) that is communicatively and controllably connected to the CMOS image sensor 232 and the LED 233.

The first board 230 and the second board 231 are connected by a BtoB (Board-to-Board) type connector (not shown), and are also connected by legs 235 provided at the corners of the boards 230 and 231. It is fixed. The specific configuration of the circuit of the camera unit 209 will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the camera unit 209 is composed of two substrates 230 and 231 and a lens has been described, but instead of this, one substrate provided with the CMOS image sensor 232, the LED 233 and the control LSI 234 is used. A camera unit may be configured. Further, an aperture mechanism may be added.

The camera unit 209 is fixed to the cancel shooter 206 by screwing the first substrate 230 into the screw holes 206b provided around the notch 206a at the top of the cancel shooter 206.

The CMOS image sensor 232 (see FIG. 17) is provided in a substantially central portion of the first substrate 230. The CMOS image sensor 232 images the imaging region A1 (see FIG. 10) on the medal rail 210 via the notch 206a (see FIG. 8) of the cancel shooter 206, and controls the captured image data 234 (FIG. 17). See).

The LED 233 (see FIG. 17) emits surface light around the CMOS image sensor 232 and irradiates an object moving on the medal rail 210 with light. The control LSI 234 (see FIG. 17) determines whether or not the object moving on the medal rail 210 is a regular medal based on the image data output from the CMOS image sensor 232, and outputs the determination result to the main control circuit 91. To do. In the present embodiment, the mode in which the camera unit 209 is fixed to the cancel shooter 206 by screwing it into the screw hole 206b formed around the notch 206a has been described, but the fixing mode of the camera unit is limited to this. Not done. For example, a mounting rail is provided between the first substrate 230 and the second substrate 231 and a recess is provided in the upper part of the cancel shooter 206, and the mounting rail is fitted in the recess, and then the mounting rail and the cancel shooter 206 are provided. May be fixed with screws or an adhesive.

<Circuit configuration of pachislot>
Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 18. First, an outline of the entire circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 (first control means) arranged on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 (control means, second control means) arranged on the front door 2b.
The main control board 71 includes a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 56, an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a power supply board 53b of the power supply device 53. It is connected. The setting key type switch 56, the external centralized terminal plate 47, the hopper device 51, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44. Since the external centralized terminal plate 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 penetrates the switch through hole (not displayed) of the medal auxiliary storage 52. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

A power switch 53a is connected to the power supply board 53b of the power supply device 53. The power switch 53a is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, the main control board 71 has a medal selector 201, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, and a game operation display board 81 via a door relay terminal board 68. And the sub-relay board 61 are connected. Since the door open / close monitoring switch 67 and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted. The circuit configuration of the medal selector 201 will be described later.

The BET switch 77 detects that the BET button 22 has been pressed by the player. The checkout switch 78 detects that the checkout button 27 has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 detects that the start lever 23 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. A stop switch is provided on the stop switch board 80. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 24 when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable and when the game is replayed. It is a substrate for making it. A 7-segment display 24 and an LED 82 are connected to the game operation display board 81. The LED 82 lights, for example, a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, and the like.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. A sound I / O board 84, LED boards 62A, 62B, 62C, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63, and a medal selector 201 are connected to the sub control board 72 via a sub relay board 61. Since the LED substrates 62A, 62B, 62C and the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The sound I / O board 84 outputs sound to a center speaker 58, a board speaker 64, lower speakers 65L and 65R, and speakers (not shown) provided on the front door 2b.

Further, the ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.
The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing image (video) for production, audio, LED boards 62A and 62B and other LED boards (not shown), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 composed of the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 91 has a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 71 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 is composed of a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94, and a main RAM 95. The main CPU 93 and the above-mentioned hopper device 51 constitute the game medium payout device of the present invention.

The main ROM 94 is for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the control program (for example, the program for executing the internal lottery process described above), the data table, and the sub control circuit 101 executed by the main CPU 93. Data etc. are stored. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 93 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).
The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is provided, for example, with an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and is provided at a predetermined position on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part are connected by rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) provided with a detection piece interposed between them.

Here, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

As described above, when the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to 4 symbols, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle of the reel display window 4 when the left stop button 19L is pressed and the 4 symbols thereof. Each symbol within the range up to the previous symbol becomes a symbol that can be stopped in the middle stage of the reel display window 4.

<Secondary control circuit>
Next, the sub-control circuit 101 composed of the sub-control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub-control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program includes a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 91, and an effect registration task for extracting an effect random value and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Is included. Further, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 2) based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the output of light by a light source such as an LED85, and speakers 58, 64, 65L. , 65R and the like include voice control tasks that control the output of sound from speakers.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. Further, a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like are included.

The sub RAM 103 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) and an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory). DRAM is a work RAM as a volatile storage means. The SRAM is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means backed up by a backup power source. When the power is turned off, the backup area composed of the SRAM of the sub RAM 103 can store the data held at the time of the power off, and the data held at the time of the power off (when the power is turned off and restored) and after the power is turned on The data in the backup area is available. Further, in the DRAM of the sub RAM 103, a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91, and other backup areas. A storage area is provided to store unallocated data (data that can be erased when the power is off). Further, the error information history area and the first switch information storage area, which will be described later, are allocated to the backup area.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers such as the speakers 58, 64, 65L, and 65R to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 102 controls the lighting and extinguishing of a light source such as the LED 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Circuit configuration of medal selector>
Next, the circuit configuration of the medal selector 201 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the medal selector 201.

As shown in FIG. 17, the medal selector 201 includes a camera unit 209, a medal solenoid 208, and a double photo sensor 502.
Further, the medal selector 201 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. Further, the medal selector 201 is connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. That is, the medal selector 201 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101.

The main control circuit 91 can set the medal solenoid 208 of the medal selector 201 to the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the main control circuit 91 can move the select plate 207 to the guide position or the discharge position.

Specifically, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is in a state where medals can be inserted, the main control circuit 91 outputs a medal insertion signal having the content that the medals can be inserted. Further, the main control circuit 91 outputs a medal insertion signal having a content that the pachislot 1 cannot insert medals when the pachislot 1 is not in a state in which medals can be inserted. Here, "outputting a medal insertion signal with contents that can be inserted" means that the signal line between the devices connected to the main control circuit 91 (medal solenoid 208 in this embodiment) is set to the ON state. is there. Further, "outputting a medal insertion signal having a content that cannot be inserted" means setting the signal line between the devices (medal solenoid 208 in this embodiment) connected to the main control circuit 91 to the OFF state. .. When the medal solenoid 208 detects that the signal line between the main control circuit 91 and the medal solenoid 208 is in the ON state, it sets itself in the ON state. Further, when the medal solenoid 208 detects that the signal line between the main control circuit 91 and the medal solenoid 208 is in the OFF state, it sets itself in the OFF state.

The double photo sensor 502 of the medal selector 201 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. The double photo sensor 502 includes a first photo sensor 503 and a second photo sensor 504.

As shown in FIG. 8, the first photosensor 503 is provided in the vicinity of the medal outlet portion 204c in the base plate portion 204 of the medal selector 201. The first photosensor 503 includes a photodiode (not shown) embedded on the medal rail 210 of the base plate portion 204, and a light emitting body (not shown) that irradiates the photodiode with light (infrared light). .. The photodiode and the illuminant are opposed to each other at a distance of more than the thickness of the medal, and when the select plate 207 is in the guide position, the medal moving on the medal rail 210 can pass between the photodiode and the illuminant. It has become.

The light emitter always emits a predetermined amount of light. When the photodiode receives a predetermined amount of light or more from the light emitter, the first photosensor 503 outputs a high-level signal. On the other hand, when the amount of light received by the photodiode becomes less than the predetermined amount of light, the first photosensor 503 outputs a low-level signal (medal detection signal). Therefore, if the light of the light emitting body is blocked when the medal passes between the photodiode and the light emitting body, the first photo sensor 503 outputs the medal detection signal.

The second photosensor 504 moves on the medal rail 210 from the first photosensor 503 in the vicinity of the medal outlet portion 204c in the base plate portion 204 of the medal selector 201 and in the vicinity of the first photosensor 503. It is provided on the downstream side in the moving direction of the medal. Since the other points are the same as those of the first photo sensor 503, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the first photosensor 503 and the second photosensor 504 constituting the double photosensor 502 block the light of the light emitter by passing the medal between the photodiode and the light emitter. , A mode of adopting a shielding type sensor method for detecting a passing object (that is, a detection method for detecting when the state of a photodiode changes from an on state to an off state) has been described. However, the mode for detecting medals with a photodiode is not limited to this. For example, a so-called reflective sensor method is adopted in which the photodiode and the light emitter are arranged on the left and right or vertically, and the light received by the medal that passes through the light of the light emitter is received by the photodiode to detect the passage of the medal. You may. Further, the first photosensor 503 may be a shielding type, the second photosensor 504 may be a reflective type, or vice versa, and these sensor methods may be appropriately selected and adopted according to the position where the photodiode is arranged. Good.

As described above, the first photosensor 503 is provided near the medal outlet portion 204c, and the second photosensor 504 is provided downstream of the first photosensor 503 on the medal rail 210. Therefore, in the first photo sensor 503 and the second photo sensor 504, the select plate 207 is in the guide position, and the medal moving to the medal outlet portion 204c (see FIG. 8) side is detected, but the select plate 207 is in the ejection position. The medal guided by the medal shoot 202 (see FIG. 6) is not detected.

The medal detection signals output from the first photo sensor 503 and the second photo sensor 504 are input to the main control board 71 (main control circuit 91) via the door relay terminal plate 68. After the main CPU 93 (see FIG. 15) of the main control board 71 detects the medal detection signal input from the first photo sensor 503, the medal detection signal input from the second photo sensor 504 is detected within a predetermined time. When it is detected, the number of inserted medals is added by 1 to the value of the inserted number counter, which is a counter provided for the main CPU 93 to count. When the value of the inserted number counter is the maximum value (for example, 3), 1 is added to the value of the credit counter, which is a counter provided for the main CPU 93 to count the number of credited medals.

When the credit counter has the maximum value (for example, 50), the main control circuit 91 sets the medal solenoid 208 of the medal selector 201 to the OFF state. As a result, the select plate 207 (see FIG. 8) is positioned at the “discharging position”, medals cannot be inserted, and the medals inserted after the credit counter reaches the maximum value are placed in the medal shoot 202 (see FIG. 6). Guide the medal out from the medal payout outlet 32 (see FIG. 2) to the medal tray unit 34.

The main control circuit 91 sets the medal solenoid 208 of the medal selector 201 to the OFF state even after the start lever 23 is operated by the player in the unit game.

Further, when the main CPU 93 receives the medal detection signal in the order of the medal detection signal input from the second photosensor 504 and the medal detection signal input from the first photosensor 503, the medal moves on the medal rail 210. It detects that a so-called retrograde error has occurred in which the vehicle moves in a movement direction different from the proper movement direction (opposite).

Further, even after a certain period of time has passed since the main CPU 93 detected the medal detection signal, the medal detection signal continues to be output from either or both of the first photo sensor 503 and the second photo sensor 504. In some cases, or if the medal detection signal from the second photosensor 504 cannot be detected even after a certain period of time has passed since the medal detection signal from the first photosensor 503 was detected, the medal stays on the medal rail 210, so-called. Detects that a medal jam error has occurred.

When the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) detects a retrograde error or a medal jam error, the game is forcibly interrupted, and an error code corresponding to the content of the detected error is displayed on the 7-segment display 24 (see FIG. 2). Is displayed, and an error command corresponding to the content of the detected error is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 to notify the error via the sub-control circuit 101. For example, an error screen indicating the content of the error (a screen in which the square frame of "CE" or "CR" in FIG. 52 described later is highlighted) may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, or the sub-control circuit 101 may display the display. When a sub 7-segment display (not shown) to be controlled is provided, a predetermined display is displayed on the sub 7-segment display.

The sub-control circuit 101 receives the color determination determination result, the marking determination determination result, and various signals and commands described later from the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 201.

The camera unit 209 includes a control LSI 234, a CMOS image sensor 232, and an LED 233. The control LSI 234 of the camera unit 209 is composed of an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit) and is electrically connected to the CMOS image sensor 232 and the LED 233. The control LSI 234 controls the light emission of the LED 233. Further, the control LSI 234 determines whether or not the object moving on the medal rail 210 is a regular medal based on the image data output from the CMOS image sensor 232, and determines the determination result from the UART 252, which will be described later, as a sub-relay board. It is transmitted to the sub-control board 72 (sub-control circuit 101) via 61.

The CMOS image sensor 232 includes an exposure time setting mechanism that sets the exposure time (shutter speed) in 1 to 25 steps. The exposure time is set to be extended by 7 μs for each step up. In the present embodiment, the initial value of the exposure time (value at the time of turning on the power of the pachislot 1) is set to step 10, that is, 70 μsec. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the exposure time can be set in the range of 70 μsec to a maximum of 175 μsec (exposure time corresponding to step 25).
The CMOS image sensor 232 used in the present embodiment is a CMOS image sensor having a resolution of 648 × 488 pixels and a frame rate of 240 fps (Frames Per Second).

Further, the control LSI 234 is electrically connected to the notification LED 206c via the GPIO250. The notification LED 206c is turned on and off in response to an instruction from the control LSI 234.
Further, the control LSI 234 is electrically connected to the initialization switch 206d, the color switch 206e, and the engraving switch 206f via the GPIO250. When the initialization switch 206d is operated (turned on) while the power is on, the control LSI 234 performs the initialization process. In the initialization process, the control LSI 234 deletes various parameters and templates stored in the SRAM 243 and the flash memory 244, which will be described later, and sets (resets) initial values in these.

The color switch 206e can be set to the ON / OFF state. When the color switch 206e is set to the ON state, the control LSI 234 enables the color determination, and the value of the color determination result included in the determination completion command described later is set to "1" (determination OK) according to the actual determination result. Or set to "0" (judgment NG). On the other hand, when the color switch 206e is set to the OFF state, the control LSI 234 invalidates the color determination, and sets the value of the color determination result included in the determination completion command described later to "1" (determination) regardless of the actual determination result. Set to OK). That is, the color switch 206e is set to the ON state when the color determination is enabled, and is set to the OFF state when the color determination is disabled.

The marking switch 206f can be set to the ON / OFF state. When the marking switch 206f is set to the ON state, the control LSI 234 enables the marking determination, and sets the value of the marking determination result included in the determination completion command described later to "1" (determination OK) according to the actual determination result. Alternatively, it is set to "0" (judgment NG). On the other hand, when the marking switch 206f is set to the OFF state, the control LSI 234 invalidates the marking determination, and sets the value of the marking determination result included in the determination completion command described later to "1" (determination) regardless of the actual determination result. Set to OK). That is, the marking switch 206f is set to the ON state when the marking determination is enabled, and is set to the OFF state when the marking determination is disabled.

In the present embodiment, the control LSI 234 sets the enable / disable of the color determination according to the ON / OFF state of the color switch e at the time of turning on the power, and also corresponds to the ON / OFF state of the marking switch f at the time of turning on the power. Set whether to enable / disable the marking judgment. Even if these switches are operated after the power is turned on, the validity / invalidity of the color judgment and the marking judgment set according to the state of the switch at the time of turning on the power is not changed. The control LSI 234 acquires the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch 206d, the color switch 206e, and the marking switch 206f at a predetermined cycle (for example, 10 msec cycle). It should be noted that this cycle is set shorter than the cycle for transmitting the medal selector non-operation command described later.

<Circuit configuration of control LSI>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control LSI 234 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the control LSI 234.

The control LSI 234 includes a host controller 241 and an image recognition DSP (digital signal processor) circuit 242, a SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) 243 to which a backup power supply (not shown) is connected, a flash memory 244, and an ISP (Image Signal Processing) circuit 245. And a medal counting circuit 246 is provided. Further, the control LSI 234 includes a color recognition circuit 247, a fisheye correction scaler circuit 248, an image recognition accelerator circuit 249, a GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output) 250, and a UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) 252. The devices constituting these control LSI 234 are connected to each other via a bus, and in the control LSI 234 of the present embodiment, AXI (Advanced eXtensible Interface) is adopted as a bus protocol.

Further, the control LSI 234 includes an ISI (Image Sensor Interface) circuit 251. The ISI circuit 251 is electrically connected to the CMOS image sensor 232 and the ISP circuit. The ISI circuit 251 converts the image data transmitted from the CMOS image sensor 232 by the LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) method into an RGB bayer image and outputs the image data. At this time, a unique image ID is attached to the RGB image output from the ISI circuit 251. This image ID is inherited by the data after various image conversions described later. Therefore, each determination result can be linked based on the image ID inherited by the data related to various determinations described later. That is, when a medal appears in the RGB image, these determination results for this medal can be associated with each other.

<ISP circuit>
When the RGB bayer image is output from the ISI circuit 251 (the RGB bayer image is input), the ISP circuit 245 outputs a VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interruption signal to the host controller 241.
Further, the ISP circuit 245 performs an image correction process of performing a lens distortion correction process and a projective transformation (homography) process on the RGB bayer image output from the ISI circuit 251.

The lens distortion correction process is a process for correcting distortion caused by the characteristics of the lens in the camera unit 209 on the image data captured by the CMOS image sensor 232 in order to improve the accuracy of various discrimination / judgment processes described later. is there.

For example, when a convex lens is used as the lens of the camera unit 209, the thickness of the edge of the lens is thinner than the thickness of the central portion of the lens, so that distortion as shown in FIG. 19 occurs. In FIG. 19, the image pickup region A1 of the CMOS image sensor 232 and the image data G1 of the image pickup region A1 imaged by the CMOS image sensor 232 are schematically shown. The black dots in the image data G1 represent points corresponding to the vertices of each grid in the imaging region A1.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the image data G1, a relatively large distortion is generated at the end portion as compared with the central portion. The ISP circuit 245 performs lens distortion correction processing based on various preset correction parameters to process the image data G1 (RGB bayer image output from the ISI circuit 251). Specifically, the image data G1 is complemented so that the position of the black spot of the image data G1 is the same position as the apex of the grid of the corresponding imaging region A1. As a result, the influence of this distortion on various discrimination processes described later is suppressed.

The various correction parameters are pre-defined in the program based on the preliminary characteristic evaluation of the lens used in the camera unit 209. The various correction parameters may be stored in the flash memory 244 and referred to by the ISP circuit 245 during the lens distortion correction process.

The projective transformation process is a process of correcting image data so that the deviation of the mounting position of the camera unit 209 does not affect the accuracy of various discrimination / determination processes described later.
For example, when the camera unit 209 is attached to the cancel shooter 206 at an angle that is not suitable, as shown in FIG. 20A, the image area A2 required for various discrimination / judgment processes described later is distorted and imaged. May occur. In the projective transformation process, this distortion is corrected, and the image data is complemented in a mode suitable for various discrimination / determination processes described later.

Specifically, in the projective conversion process, the ISP circuit 245 analyzes the RGB Bayer image after the lens distortion correction process and detects the positions (coordinates: x, y) of at least four reference markers 260 in the RGB Bayer image. To do.

Next, at the position (coordinates: u, v) of the reference marker 260 in the image data suitable for improving the accuracy of various discrimination processes defined in advance in the program corresponding to the detected four reference markers. Based on this, the conversion coefficients a, b, c, d, e, f, g, and h in the following equations 1 and 2 are calculated.
u = (x × a + y × b + c) / (x × g + y × h + 1) ・ ・ ・ Equation (1)
v = (x × d + y × e + f) / (x × g + y × h + 1) ・ ・ ・ Equation (2)

Then, the calculated conversion coefficients a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h and the coordinate values of each pixel in the RGB Bayer image after the lens distortion correction processing are substituted into the above equations 1 and 2. , The converted coordinates for each pixel are calculated, and the RGB Bayer image is processed so that each pixel is located at the calculated converted coordinates. FIG. 20B schematically represents the image region A2 shown in FIG. 20A in the RGB bayer image after the projective transformation process.

In this embodiment, an embodiment in which the position (coordinates: u, v) of the reference marker 260 in the image data suitable for improving the accuracy of various discrimination processes is defined programmatically has been described. However, instead of this, for example, the position of the reference marker 260 may be stored in the flash memory 244 and referred to by the ISP circuit 245 during the projective transformation process.

Next, the ISP circuit 245 performs a color conversion process for converting the RGB bayer image after the lens distortion correction process and the projective conversion process into various formats. In the color conversion process, the ISP circuit 245 converts the RGB bayer image into image data (YUV image data) corresponding to the YUV color space, and data related to brightness in this YUV image data (hereinafter, "gray scale image data"". Is output to the medal count circuit 246 (output to a predetermined area of the SRAM 243 referred to by the medal count circuit 246). Further, the grayscale image data is stored in the SRAM 243. The SRAM 243 is provided with a storage area that can store a predetermined number of gray scale image data. When the number of grayscale image data stored in SRAM 243 reaches the upper limit, the stored order is overwritten from the oldest grayscale image data.

Further, in the color conversion process, the ISP circuit 245 converts the RGB bayer image into image data (HSV) corresponding to a color space (HSV color space) composed of three components (H: hue, S: saturation, V: brightness). It is converted into image data) and the HSV image data is output to the color recognition circuit 247 (output to a predetermined area of the SRAM 243 referred to by the color recognition circuit 247).

Further, in the ISP circuit 245, when the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on, when the RGB bayer image is output from the ISI circuit 251 (the RGB bayer image is input), whether or not the output image includes a predetermined image. Performs AE (Auto Exposure) determination processing to determine whether or not. In the present embodiment, the predetermined image is an image of the ridge portion 210a (see FIG. 8) formed on the surface of the medal rail 210. That is, in the present embodiment, the ISP circuit 245 constitutes an image determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined image is included in the image data.

When the ISP circuit 245 can extract a linear component having a predetermined length or more from the image output from the ISI circuit 251, the ISP circuit 245 determines that the output image includes an image of the ridge portion 210a and extracts the image. When it cannot be done, it is determined that the output image does not include the image of the ridge portion 210a. It should be noted that the extraction of linear components having a predetermined length or longer from the output image is performed, for example, by performing a Hough transform process on the output image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other feature extraction methods are used. May be good.

When the ISP circuit 245 determines that the image output from the ISI circuit 251 includes the image of the ridge portion 210a, the ISP circuit 245 does not output the determination result of this AE determination process to the host controller 241 and thereafter. , The image output from the ISI circuit 251 is not subjected to the AE determination process.

On the other hand, when the ISP circuit 245 determines that the image output from the ISI circuit 251 does not include the image of the ridge portion 210a, the ISP circuit 245 outputs the determination result of this AE determination process to the host controller 241. Further, when the ISP circuit 245 outputs an image from the ISI circuit 251 until the exposure time of the CMOS image sensor 232 is set to the upper limit of 175 μsec (exposure time corresponding to the step 25) in the present embodiment, The AE determination process is performed on the output image.

In this embodiment, an embodiment in which the predetermined image is a ridge portion 210a formed on the surface of the medal rail 210 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined image may be, for example, a reference marker 260 formed on the medal rail 210. Further, although the mode of determining whether or not the linear component can be extracted from the output image has been described, the determination is not limited to this, and the determination may be made based on the angle of view intensity of the extracted linear component.

<Color recognition circuit>
The color recognition circuit 247 performs color determination processing based on the hue and saturation in the HSV image data output from the ISP circuit 245. The color determination process includes a medal detection process, a threshold value determination process, a saturation / hue multiplication process, a color template generation process, and a color template comparison process.

(1) Medal detection process In the color determination process, the color recognition circuit 247 stores the HSV image data output from the ISP circuit 245 in the SRAM 243. The SRAM 243 is provided with a storage area that can store a predetermined number of HSV image data. When the number of HSV image data stored in the SRAM 243 reaches the upper limit, the stored order is overwritten from the oldest HSV image data.

Further, the color recognition circuit 247 performs a medal detection process for determining whether or not the HSV image data output from the ISP circuit 245 includes a medal image. Specifically, this time, the difference between the HSV image data output from the ISP circuit 245 and the background HSV image data stored in the SRAM 243 is detected, and if the difference portion matches the shape of the medal, the medal It is determined that the image of is included. The background HSV image data is HSV image data that does not include the image of the medal, and is an image captured by the CMOS image sensor 232 when the medal is not moving on the medal rail 210, for example, immediately after the power is turned on. The data is obtained by converting the data into HSV image data by the ISP circuit 245. In this embodiment, the ISP circuit 245 stores the obtained background HSV image data in the SRAM 243. Whether or not the detected difference portion matches the medal shape is determined by comparing with the HSV image data of the medal shape previously stored in the flash memory 244.

(2) Threshold value determination process When it is determined that the HSV image data includes a medal image, the color recognition circuit 247 performs a threshold value determination process based on the HSV image data. In the threshold determination process, the color recognition circuit 247 is within a predetermined region of the medal image in the HSV image data, for example, in the present embodiment, a substantially square region including the center of the medal (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “medal region”). The saturation values of all the pixels are integrated, and the hue values are integrated. Then, the integrated value is divided by the number of pixels in the medal region to calculate the average saturation value and the average hue value, and the position on the threshold graph shown in FIG. 21 is specified based on the calculated values.

Here, the threshold graph of FIG. 21 is a graph in which the vertical axis is the saturation value and the horizontal axis is the hue value. In the threshold graph, the graph is divided into an allowable area and a non-allowable area based on a predetermined formula. In FIG. 21, the background of the allowable area is represented by a white background, and the background of the non-allowable region is represented by shading.

If the position on the threshold graph based on the average saturation value and the average hue value is within the permissible region, the color determination process is continued. On the other hand, if it is within the non-allowable area, "threshold value determination impossible" is stored in the color determination storage area of SRAM 243 as the determination result of the color determination process, and the color determination process is terminated. A predetermined number of determination results can be stored in the color determination storage area of the SRAM 243, and when the stored determination results reach the upper limit number, the stored determination results are overwritten from the earliest determination result.

Instead of the above, the color recognition circuit 247 specifies the position of each pixel in the medal region on the threshold graph shown in FIG. 21 based on the saturation value and the hue value of the pixel. May be good. In this case, it is determined whether or not the number of pixels positioned in the non-allowable area exceeds a predetermined number, for example, 20% of the number of pixels in the medal area. If not, the color determination process is continued and exceeds. In this case, the SRAM 243 may store "threshold determination impossible" as the determination result of the color determination process, and the color determination process may be terminated.

Further, the allowable area and the non-allowable area in the threshold graph can be set as appropriate. For example, in addition to the non-allowable region of FIG. 21, when the saturation value is a predetermined value or more, for example, 90 or more, a non-allowable region may be provided so as to be located in the non-allowable region.

(3) Saturation / Hue Multiplication Process After the threshold value determination process, the color recognition circuit 247 performs the saturation / hue multiplication process in the threshold value determination process. In the saturation / hue multiplication process, the saturation value of each pixel in the medal area is multiplied by the hue value, and the value calculated by the multiplication is stored in SRAM 243 in association with the position of the pixel. In the following description, when the group of data stored by associating the multiplication value of the saturation value and the hue value of each pixel in the medal area with the position of the pixel is referred to as "color determination data". There is.

(4) Color template generation process The color template generation process is a process of generating (creating) a color template used in the color template comparison process described later. In the color template generation process, the color recognition circuit 247 mutually compares and matches the color determination data related to each medal up to the specified initial number of medals inserted after the power is turned on, and 50 medals in the present embodiment. Or group color determination data that are similar to a certain degree.

For example, the color recognition circuit 247 compares the multiplication value of the saturation value and the hue value for each of the positions of the associated pixels with respect to the color determination data related to 50 medals. Then, when the number of multiplication values that match or are within a predetermined error range (for example, ± 5) is a predetermined number or more (for example, 80% or more of all multiplication values), these color determination data are grouped. ..

Next, the color recognition circuit 247 selects the top four groups in descending order of the number of color determination data to which the color recognition circuit 247 belongs. Then, any one color determination data is selected for each of the selected top four groups, and the four color determination data are stored as color templates in the storage area for storing the color template of SRAM 243. For each of the top four selected groups, instead of selecting any one color determination data, the average value of the color determination data belonging to the same group (the average value of the multiplication values related to each pixel). ) May be generated to generate a color template. Further, the color template stored in the SRAM 243 may be erased by the initialization process (not shown) of the host controller 241 when the power of the game machine is turned on.

By generating the color template as described above, for example, when two types of medals having different markings (patterns) and colors on the front and back are used as regular medals, and the color template is stored in the storage area of SRAM 243. If it is not stored, 50 of these regular medals can be inserted after the power is turned on to generate four types of color templates for the front and back of these two types of medals. If the color template is not stored in the storage area of SRAM 243 and there is only one type of 50 regular medals inserted after the power is turned on, two types of colors related to the front and back of the regular medals are used. A template is generated, and in the color template comparison process described later, the two types of generated color templates are used.

When the color template is not stored in the storage area of SRAM 243, the number of medals inserted after the power is turned on is the specified initial number of inserted medals, and in the present embodiment, the color determination data for each medal up to 50 is obtained. It is generated according to the instruction of the host controller 241. When the medal counting circuit 246, which will be described later, determines that the medal has passed on the medal rail 210, the host controller 241 determines that the HSV image data is time before the determination (that is, before the predetermined frame). Is instructed to the color recognition circuit 247 to generate the color determination data. The predetermined time is set in advance based on experiments and simulations so that the HSV image data before the predetermined time always includes the image of the medal.

Further, the color determination data is generated through the above-mentioned medal detection process, threshold value determination process, and saturation / hue multiplication process, and is stored in the color determination data storage area of SRAM 243. The color recognition circuit 247 executes a color template generation process when the number of color determination data stored in the color determination data storage area reaches 50, that is, when color determination data related to 50 medals is created. To do.

In the color template generation process, if the color template cannot be created because the color determination data that are similar to a certain degree cannot be grouped, the color recognition circuit 247 requests the host controller 241 to send a medal selector error command. .. The host controller 241 transmits a medal selector error command in response to the request. The value of DAT0 of this medal selector error command is set to "4" indicating "color template generation error". The details of the medal selector error command will be described later.

(5) Color template comparison process When it is determined that the medal image is included in the medal detection process after the color template generation process, the color recognition circuit 247 performs the color template comparison process.

In the color template comparison process, the HSV image data determined to contain the image of the medal is compared with the color template with the color determination data created through the threshold determination process and the saturation / hue multiplication process. , Match or a predetermined degree of similarity is determined, and "OK" or "NO" is stored in the color determination storage area of SRAM 243 as the determination result. In this embodiment, since a maximum of four color templates are used, the determination results for the maximum of four templates are stored in the SRAM 243. Further, in the color template comparison process, the color determination result is stored in the color determination storage area of the SRAM 243. Here, as the color judgment result, when at least one "OK" is stored as the judgment result for a maximum of four templates, "Judgment OK" is stored, and when all "No" are stored. "Judgment NG" is stored. Therefore, in one color template comparison process, a maximum of four determination results (possible or unacceptable) for a maximum of four color templates and one color determination result (determination OK or determination NG) based on these determination results are stored. To. When the color determination result is stored in the color determination storage area of the SRAM 243, the color recognition circuit 247 stores the above-mentioned image ID inherited by the HSV image data related to the determination and the color determination result in association with each other. Further, a predetermined number of determination results can be stored in the color determination result area, and when the stored determination results reach the upper limit number, the stored determination results are overwritten from the earliest determination result.

For example, the color recognition circuit 247 compares the product of the color determination data, the saturation value in the color template, and the hue value for each position of the associated pixel. Then, when the number of multiplication values that match or are within a predetermined error range (for example, ± 5) is a predetermined number or more (for example, 80% or more of all multiplication values), it is determined that they match or are similar to a predetermined degree. In this process, the criteria for determining whether or not they match or are similar to a predetermined degree can be appropriately set.

As described above, in the color determination process, the threshold value determination process is performed, the color template comparison process is performed, the color determination data is compared with the color template, and it is determined whether or not they match or are similar to a predetermined degree. The color recognition circuit 247 constitutes a game medium determination means for determining whether or not the object passing on the medal rail 210 is a regular medal.

<Medal count circuit>
The medal counting circuit 246 performs counting processing based on the grayscale image data output from the ISP circuit 245. The counting process includes a medal image discrimination process, a medal position detection process, and an order determination process.

(1) Medal image discrimination process In the count process, the medal count circuit 246 first performs a medal image discrimination process. In the medal image discrimination process, the medal count circuit 246 determines whether or not the medal image is included in the grayscale image data output from the ISP circuit 245. Specifically, this time, a difference is detected for each pixel of the grayscale image data output from the ISP circuit 245 and the background grayscale image data stored in the SRAM 243, and the difference is formed by a plurality of detected pixels. When the shape to be formed matches the template data of the medal shape stored in the flash memory 244, it is determined that the image of the medal is included. The background grayscale image data is grayscale image data that does not include the image of the medal, and is captured by the CMOS image sensor 232 when the medal is not moving on the medal rail 210, for example, immediately after the power is turned on. It is obtained by converting the image data to grayscale image data by the ISP circuit 245. In the present embodiment, the ISP circuit 245 stores the obtained background grayscale image data in the SRAM 243. In the present embodiment, the medal count circuit 246 detects the difference between the background grayscale image data and the grayscale image data output from the ISP circuit 245, and the shape formed by the plurality of pixels in which the difference is detected is a medal. It was determined whether or not the image of the medal was included depending on whether or not it matched the shape. However, not limited to this, even if it is determined that the image of the medal is included depending on whether or not a part of the shape formed by the plurality of pixels in which the difference is detected matches a part of the medal shape. Alternatively, when the number of detected difference pixels is a certain number or more, it may be determined that the image of the medal is included.

(2) Medal position detection process Next, the medal count circuit 246 is the grayscale image data output from the ISP circuit 245, and the grayscale determined by the medal image discrimination process to include the medal image. The medal position detection process is performed on the image data. In the medal position detection process, the medal count circuit 246 determines whether or not the medal image exists in the predetermined determination area in the grayscale image data, and stores the determination result in the SRAM 243.

The predetermined determination area is a plurality of rectangular areas in the gray scale image data G2, and in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, the determination areas A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1, C2 , D1 to D4, E and F, a total of 16 determination areas are set. 22A to 22C, 23D to F, and 24G are diagrams for explaining the relationship between the medal M passing over the medal rail 210 and being discharged from the medal outlet portion 204c and the determination region. Further, FIG. 24H is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the medal guided by the medal shoot 202 and the determination area.

Each determination area is predetermined in the program by defining the coordinate values (X, Y) of the corners of each determination area in the gray scale image data G2 so that the determination area includes a plurality of pixels. ing. For example, as shown in FIG. 25, the determination region of C1 includes eight pixels in the region, and the coordinate values of the four corners (450, 95), (453, 95), (450, 96), ( The position is defined by 453,96). In FIG. 25, one square of the grid indicates one pixel.

As shown in FIGS. 22A to 22C, 23D to F, and 24G, the determination areas A1 to A4 and B1 to B4 pass on the medal rail 210, and the lower part of the image of the medal M discharged from the medal outlet portion 204c. It is arranged so as to overlap with. Further, the determination areas C1 and C2 are arranged so as to pass over the medal rail 210 and overlap the upper part of the image of the medal M discharged from the medal outlet portion 204c. Further, the determination areas E and F are arranged so as not to overlap the image of the medal M that passes over the medal rail 210 and is discharged from the medal outlet portion 204c.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24H, the determination area F is arranged in the lower part of the grayscale image data G2 so as to overlap the image of the medal M when the medal is guided by the medal shoot 202. Further, the determination area E is located above the path of the medal M, and is arranged above the grayscale image data G2 so as to overlap the images of various instruments used for fraudulent activities.

The medal count circuit 246 calculates the difference value of the brightness of each pixel in each determination area of the grayscale image data to be processed and the background grayscale image data, and calculates the number of pixels whose calculated difference value is equal to or larger than the threshold value. Count for each judgment area. Then, the medal counting circuit 246 determines whether or not the number of counted pixels is a predetermined number (for example, 1 in the present embodiment) or more for each determination region, and if it is determined that the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number. , It is determined that the image of the medal exists in the determination area (there is a medal). On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of counted pixels is less than a predetermined number, it is determined that the image of the medal does not exist in the determination area (there is no medal). In the present embodiment, the mode in which the grayscale image data is used in this process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, for color determination generated by multiplying the saturation and hue used in the above-mentioned color determination process. Data may be used.

Further, the medal count circuit 246 performs the medal edge detection process on the determination area where it is determined that the image of the medal exists (there is a medal) in the medal position detection process.

The medal edge detection process is a process of detecting the outer edge of a medal based on the arrangement of pixels whose brightness difference value is less than the threshold value in the determination area where it is determined that the medal image exists. In the present embodiment, the moving direction of the medal is from left to right in FIGS. 22 to 25. Therefore, if there is at least one pixel on the right side where the difference value of the brightness is less than the threshold value in the determined determination area where the medal image exists, the medal counting circuit 246 will perform the outer edge (moving destination direction) on the front side in the moving direction of the medal. It is determined that the medal edge) exists.

On the other hand, if there is at least one pixel on the left side where the difference value of the brightness is less than the threshold value in the determined determination area where the medal image exists, the medal counting circuit 246 is the outer edge (after movement) on the rear side in the movement direction of the medal. It is determined that the direction medal edge) exists. If there is no pixel whose brightness difference value is less than the threshold value, the medal counting circuit 246 determines that there is no outer edge of the medal in the determination area.

For example, in the determination area C1 shown in FIG. 25, if any of the pixels 5C to 8C, which are the pixels located on the right side, has at least one pixel whose luminance difference value does not reach the threshold value, the movement destination direction medal Judge that there is an edge. On the other hand, if any of the pixels 1C to 4C located on the left side has at least one pixel whose luminance difference value does not meet the threshold value, it is determined that there is a medal edge in the post-movement direction.

Regarding the determination areas E and F, since it is considered that the moving direction of the medal or various instruments is from the top to the bottom in FIGS. 22 to 24, the difference value of the brightness is lower than the pixel whose brightness is equal to or more than the threshold value. When there is at least one pixel whose difference value is less than the threshold value, the medal counting circuit 246 determines that the lower outer edge (medal edge in the moving destination direction) exists in the moving direction of the medal. On the other hand, when there is at least one pixel whose brightness difference value is above the threshold value and whose brightness difference value is less than the threshold value, the medal count circuit 246 sets the upper outer edge (after movement) of the medal in the moving direction. It is determined that the direction medal edge) exists. Further, when there is no pixel whose brightness difference value is less than the threshold value for the pixels located below or above the pixel whose brightness difference value is equal to or higher than the threshold value, the medal counting circuit 246 will generate a medal in the determination area. It is determined that the image exists, but there is no outer edge of the medal.

Then, the medal count circuit 246 determines the above determination result, that is, the determination result of whether or not the medal image exists in the determination area, and the medal edge in the moving destination direction for each determination area of the grayscale image data to be determined. Alternatively, the SRAM 243 stores the determination result of whether or not the medal edge in the post-movement direction exists. For example, the medal counting circuit 246 stores data of "OFF" in the determination area where it is determined that the image of the medal does not exist. Further, the data "IN" is used for the judgment area determined to have the movement destination direction medal edge, the data "OUT" is used for the judgment area determined to have the moving destination direction medal edge, and the medal image. Is present, but the data "ON" is stored in the determination area where it is determined that there is no outer edge of the medal.
If the determination result is already stored in the SRAM 243, the medal count circuit 246 compares the latest determination result with the current determination result, and changes to the determination result in any one of the determination areas. If there is, the SRAM 243 stores the determination results for all the determination areas this time. On the other hand, if there is no change in the determination results of any of the determination areas, the SRAM 243 does not store the determination results for all the determination areas this time.

Further, the medal counting circuit 246 omits the determination of the determination areas A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1, C2, D1 to D4 when the medal cannot be inserted, for example, when the credit counter has the maximum value as described later. To do. Further, in this case, the medal counting circuit 246 indicates to the SRAM that the above determination is omitted, that is, the determination is not made with respect to the determination areas A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1, C2, and D1 to D4. * ”Data (specifically, hexadecimal number“ FF ”) is stored.

Therefore, for the eight grayscale image data G2 shown in FIGS. 22A to C, 23D to F, and 24G and H, the determination area determination result data as shown in FIG. 26 is stored in the SRAM 243. For example, with respect to the grayscale image data G2 of FIG. 22A, since it is determined that the medal edge in the movement destination direction exists with respect to the determination areas A1 and A2, the data "IN" (specifically, a hexadecimal number). "01") is stored, and it is determined that the medal image does not exist for the other determination areas. Therefore, the data "OFF" (specifically, the hexadecimal number "00") is stored. It will be remembered.

Further, regarding the grayscale image data of FIG. 23E, since it is determined that the medal image does not exist in the determination areas A1 to A4, E and F, the data "OFF" is stored. Further, since it is determined that the medal edge in the post-movement direction exists for the determination areas B1, B2, C1 and C2, the data "OUT" (specifically, the hexadecimal number "02") is stored. Will be done. Further, for the determination areas B3, B4, D1 to D4, although the medal image exists, it is determined that there is no outer edge of the medal, so the data "ON" (specifically, the hexadecimal number "" 03 ") is stored.

Further, regarding the grayscale image data G2 shown in FIG. 24H, since it is determined that the medal image exists but the outer edge of the medal does not exist with respect to the determination area F, the data “ON” is stored. Further, in the determination areas A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1, C2, D1 to D4, the data "*" indicating that the determination has not been made is stored.

The grayscale image data G2 of FIGS. 22A to 22C, 23D to F, and 24G is output from the ISP circuit 245 when the medal passes over the medal rail 210 and is discharged from the medal outlet portion 204c. Of the grayscale image data G2, seven grayscale image data G2 are extracted for convenience of explanation. That is, in the same case, the grayscale image data output from the ISP circuit 245 exists in addition to the grayscale image data G2 shown in FIGS. 22A to C, 23D to F, and 24G.

Further, the SRAM 243 is provided with a storage area for storing a predetermined number of determination area determination result data, that is, 14 grayscale image data in the present embodiment.

(3) Order determination processing When the pachislot 1 is in a state where medals can be inserted, the medal counting circuit 246 displays a predetermined number of determination area determination result data in the SRAM 243, or 14 grayscale image data in the present embodiment. When the above-mentioned determination result is stored, the order determination process is performed. Further, in the medal counting circuit 246, when the pachislot 1 is in a state where medals cannot be inserted, the above-mentioned determination result relating to a predetermined number of determination area determination result data, or four grayscale image data in the present embodiment, is stored in the SRAM 243. Is stored, the order determination process is performed. In the order determination process, in a predetermined number of grayscale image data arranged in chronological order, the transition mode of the data of "IN", "OUT", "ON", and "OFF" for each determination area is a predetermined transition. It is determined whether or not the aspect matches the above aspect, and if they match, it is determined that the medal has passed on the medal rail 210.

Here, as a predetermined transition mode, in the present embodiment, the medal count determination table shown in FIG. 27 is converted into a numerical value and stored in the flash memory 244. In the medal count judgment table, "IN" and "IN" in each judgment area on the 14 grayscale image data arranged in chronological order when the medal passes on the medal rail 210 and is discharged from the medal exit portion 204c. The mode of data transition of "OUT", "ON", and "OFF" is defined. In addition, the data of "IN", "OUT", "ON", and "OFF" in each determination area on the four grayscale image data arranged in chronological order when the medal is guided by the medal shoot 202. The mode of transition is defined. The mode of transition of these data is defined in advance assuming that the medal moves at the fastest speed by simulation or experiment.

In the order determination process when the pachislot 1 is in a state where medals can be inserted, the medal count circuit 246 has data (“IN”, “OUT”” in each determination area of 14 grayscale image data stored in the SRAM 243. , "ON", "OFF") and the data transition mode corresponding to the time series 1 to 14 specified in the medal count judgment table are compared, and if they match completely, It is determined that the medal has passed.

If they do not match, it is determined that "an abnormality has occurred". If they do not match, for example, the first half of the mode of data transition in each determination area of 14 grayscale image data (hereinafter, may be referred to as "mode of transition of data to be compared") It matches the mode of the data transition corresponding to the time series 1 to 8 specified in the medal count judgment table, but the following part is the data transition corresponding to the time series 8 to 4 specified in the medal count judgment table. If it matches the aspect of, so-called "reverse of time series" may occur.

Further, in the order determination process when the pachislot 1 cannot insert medals, the medal count circuit 246 determines the mode of data transition in each determination area of the four grayscale image data stored in the SRAM 243. The data transition modes corresponding to the time series E1 to E4 specified in the medal count determination table are compared with each other, and if they match completely, it is determined that "the medal has been guided to the medal shoot 202".

Further, even after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the data (“IN”, “OUT”, “ON”, “OFF”) in each determination area is first stored in the SRAM 243, the data is input to the SRAM 243. If the data in each determination area of the grayscale image data for 14 pieces if possible or 4 pieces if not input is not stored, it is considered that the medal is jammed. Therefore, in this case, the medal counting circuit 246 determines that "an abnormality has occurred".

If the number of data (“IN”, “OUT”, “ON”, “OFF”) in each determination area of the grayscale image data stored in the SRAM 243 is less than a predetermined number, for example, four or more. If the number is less than 14, the transition modes do not match due to insufficient number of data. Therefore, in the above comparison process, it is determined that "the medal has passed" or "the medal has been guided to the medal shoot 202". There is nothing. In this case, the above comparison process may be omitted. Further, after performing the order determination process, the medal count circuit 246 deletes the data in each determination area of the 14 or 4 grayscale image data stored in the SRAM 243.

Further, in the medal counting circuit 246, when any one of "IN", "OUT", and "ON" data is stored in the determination area E of the grayscale image data in the SRAM 243, 14 pieces or 14 pieces are stored in the SRAM 243. It is determined that "an abnormality has occurred" without waiting for the data in each determination area of the four grayscale image data to be stored.

Further, in the order determination process, the medal count circuit 246 stores the above-mentioned determination result in the order determination process in the SRAM 243 as the determination result of the count process. That is, in the SRAM 243, as the determination result of the counting process, "the medal has passed" (specifically, the hexadecimal number "01") and "the medal has been guided to the medal shoot 202" (the specific numerical value). As a hexadecimal number "02") and "an abnormality has occurred" (specifically, a hexadecimal number "10"), three types of determination results are stored. Here, the case where it is determined that "the medal has passed" is, for example, the case where the medal is inserted in the state where the medal can be inserted in the main control circuit 91. Further, the case where it is determined that "the medal has been guided to the medal shoot 202" is the case where an illegal medal having an outer diameter smaller than the specified medal is inserted while the medal can be inserted in the main control circuit 91, or the main case. This is a case where medals are inserted in a state where medals cannot be inserted in the control circuit 91. In addition, the case where it is determined that "an abnormality has occurred" is compared with the case where some foreign matter is detected outside the range through which the medal passes, or the mode of data transition specified in the above-mentioned medal counter judgment table. This is a case where the mode of transition of the target data does not match.

As a result of the above comparison, instead of determining that "the medal has passed" or "the medal has been guided by the medal shoot 202" in the case of an exact match, a predetermined degree, for example, the degree of match is 80% or more. In this case, it may be determined that "the medal has passed" or "guided by the medal shoot 202" in consideration of a predetermined determination margin.

Further, in the medal position detection process, the medal edge detection process may be omitted. In this case, the medal count circuit 246 stores data of "OFF" in the SRAM 243 for the determination area determined that the medal image does not exist, and "ON" for the determination area determined that the medal image does exist. To memorize the data. Then, the medal count determination table shown in FIG. 27 defines the mode of transition of “ON” and “OFF” data in each determination area.

Further, in the order determination process, instead of the comparison using the medal count determination table shown in FIG. 27, the order of the determination areas in which the “ON” data is stored is defined in advance, and the predetermined order and the actual order are specified. The passage of the medal may be determined by comparing the order of the determination areas in which the "ON" data is stored. In this case, the predetermined order is grouped with the judgment areas A1 to A4 as the A area, the judgment areas B1 to B4 as the B area, the judgment areas C1 and C2 as the C area, and the judgment areas D1 to D4 as the D area. May be specified in. For example, in a predetermined order, all of the A to D regions are "OFF", then only the A region is "ON", then the A region, the B region and the C region are "ON", and then the B region, the C region and the D region. May be "ON", then only the D region may be "ON", and finally any of the A to D regions may be "OFF". In this case, when the area A is "ON", the data of "ON" is stored in any of the determination areas A1 to A4.

Further, the number, shape, and arrangement location of the determination areas to be set on the grayscale image data can be appropriately set according to the allowable determination time required and the accuracy of the determination to be obtained. For example, in FIGS. 22A to 22C, 23D to F, and 24G, H, a determination region extending in the vertical direction from the upper end to the lower end of the gray scale image data G2 may be set.

<Fisheye correction scaler circuit>
The fisheye correction scaler circuit 248 acquires grayscale image data from SRAM 243 and performs fisheye correction processing for correcting the fisheye of the acquired grayscale image data.

Further, the fisheye correction scaler circuit 248 performs an equalization process on the grayscale image data that has undergone the fisheye correction process. In the equalization process, the fisheye correction scaler circuit 248 creates reduced image data reduced to 1/2, 1/4, 1/8.

In addition, the fisheye correction scaler circuit 248 performs bilateral conversion processing on each of the created reduced image data in the equalization processing. In this embodiment, in order to remove noise in the reduced image data, a Gaussian filter of a 3 × 3 kernel (kernel in image processing, not a kernel showing OS functions) shown in FIG. 28 is used. However, the Gaussian filter has a drawback that the edges in the image data become inconspicuous (blurred). Therefore, in order to eliminate this drawback, a bilateral filter represented by the following equation 3 is adopted as a processing algorithm for the bilateral conversion process. That is, the bilateral filter is a filter that uses the kernel of the Gaussian filter to remove noise in image data and perform edge correction and enhancement.

In Equation 1, let f (i, j) be the array of image data before the bilateral transformation process, and g (i, j) be the array of image data after the process. Further, w represents the kernel size, σ represents the standard deviation, and d represents the difference in the brightness value.

Then, the fisheye correction scaler circuit 248 stores the reduced image data subjected to the equalization process in the SRAM 243. The SRAM 243 is provided with a storage area that can store a predetermined number of reduced image data. When the number of reduced image data stored in SRAM 243 reaches the upper limit, the stored order is overwritten from the oldest reduced image data.

<Image recognition DSP circuit>
When the reduced image data is stored in the SRAM 243, the host controller 241 instructs the image recognition DSP circuit to perform preprocessing.

The image recognition DSP circuit 242 acquires reduced image data (reduced image data reduced to 1/4 in this embodiment) from SRAM 243 in preprocessing, and detects a circular area from the acquired reduced image data. The processing and the non-linear diffusion filter processing are performed to create an edge image, which is then stored in the SRAM 243. Further, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 performs various determination processes described later. In the present embodiment, the image data reduced to 1/4 is used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting for selecting the reduced image data to be used in the flash memory 244 is stored, and the setting is adjusted according to the setting. Therefore, the image data reduced to 1/2 or the image data reduced to 1/8 may be selected.

(1) Circle area detection processing The image recognition DSP circuit 242 generates a background subtraction image showing the difference between the acquired reduced image data and the reduced background grayscale image data corresponding to the reduced image data in the circle area detection processing. To do. Here, the reduced background grayscale image data is image data obtained by subjecting the background grayscale image data stored in SRAM 243 to fisheye correction processing and equalization processing by the fisheye correction scaler circuit 248, and is circular area detection processing. It is stored in SRAM 243 before.

Next, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 binarizes the generated background subtraction image. Then, as shown in FIG. 29, template matching is performed on the binary background subtraction image G3 using the binary outer shape template T1 showing the outer shape of the medal. That is, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 specifies where a region similar to the outer shape template T1 exists in the background subtraction image G3. In other words, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 specifies where in the background subtraction image G3 there is a region that matches the outer shape of the medal indicated by the outer shape template T1. The outer shape template T1 is stored in the flash memory 244 in advance.

In template matching, the outer shape template T1 is moved little by little (for example, one pixel at a time) in the raster scan direction on the background subtraction image G3. In other words, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 raster-scans the outline template T1 on the background subtraction image G3. At this time, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 generates an AND image of the outer shape template T1 and the partial region of the background subtraction image G3 that overlaps the outer shape template T1 at each position of the outer shape template T1. As a result, a plurality of binary AND images are generated. Then, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 has background subtraction of the outer shape template T1 used in the generation of the AND image having the largest number of pixels (high-luminance pixels) having a pixel value of "1" among the generated plurality of AND images. Identify the position on image G3. This position is a position where a region similar to the outer shape template T1 exists in the background subtraction image G3.

Then, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 detects a partial region of the acquired reduced image data existing at the same position as the specified position as a circular region. In other words, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 detects a partial area in the reduced image data that overlaps the outer shape template T1 as a circular area when the outer shape template T1 is placed in the reduced image data at the same position as the specified position. .. At this time, in the partial region, the circle region may be a portion in which the pixel value of each pixel outside the circle indicated by the outer shape template T1 is set to zero. The circular region extracted by the image recognition DSP circuit 242 is a grayscale image. In the present embodiment, the outer shape of the circular region is a quadrangular shape, but other shapes such as a circular shape may be used.

In addition, another method may be adopted as a method of extracting a circle area from the acquired reduced image data. For example, an extraction method utilizing the fact that the outer shape of the medal is circular may be adopted. In this extraction method, first, edge detection is performed on the acquired reduced image data to generate an edge image. As a method for generating an edge image, for example, the Sobel method, the Laplacian method, the Canny method, or the like is used. Next, a circular region is extracted from the generated edge image. As a method for extracting a circular region, for example, a Hough transform is used. Then, the circular region in the acquired reduced image data existing at the same position as the position of the circular region in the edge image is defined as the circular region.

Further, an extraction method of extracting a circular region from the reduced image data acquired by using the background subtraction method and labeling may be adopted. In this extraction method, first, a background subtraction image showing the difference between the acquired reduced image data and the reduced background grayscale image data is generated, and the generated background subtraction image is binarized. Then, labeling such as 4-linking is performed on the binary background subtraction image. Then, in the binary background subtraction image, a partial area of the acquired reduced image data existing at the same position as the position of the connected area (independent area) obtained as a result of labeling is defined as a circular area.

When the circular region can be detected, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 stores "determination OK" as the determination result of the circular detection and the above-mentioned image ID inherited by the data related to the determination in the SRAM 243 in association with each other. Let me.

(2) Filter processing The image recognition DSP circuit 242 performs filter processing after the circular region detection processing. The filtering process includes a 3σ correction process and a non-linear diffusion filter process.
First, in the 3σ correction process, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 cuts out the image data of the circular region in the acquired reduced image data based on the circular region detected by the circular region detection process. Hereinafter, the cut out image data may be referred to as a circular region image data.

Next, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 creates a normal distribution (see FIG. 30) centered on the average value of the data in a certain range with respect to the luminance value in the cut out circular region image data. Here, 3σ is three times the standard deviation, and almost all data belong within the range of the mean value ± 3σ (when the variation is a normal distribution, 99.7% of the data is within this range. It belongs to).
Then, the brightness of the pixel whose brightness value is smaller than -3σ, for example, the brightness of the pixel of -4σ is replaced with the brightness value of -3σ. Further, the brightness of a pixel whose brightness value is larger than 3σ, for example, the brightness of a pixel having a brightness value of 4σ is replaced with the brightness value of 3σ. By doing so, it is possible that pixels with extremely large brightness values (pixels that are too bright) and pixels with extremely small brightness values (pixels that are too dark), which are irregular data, affect the subsequent processing. It can be suppressed.

Next, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 performs nonlinear diffusion filter processing on the circular region image data after the 3σ correction processing to create an edge image X in the X (vertical) direction and an edge image Y in the Y (horizontal) direction. To do.

FIG. 31A schematically shows the circular region image data after the 3σ correction process. In FIG. 31A, one square of the grid represents a pixel. Further, FIG. 31B shows the coefficient for edge image X. Here, assuming that the brightness values of the pixels A1 to A8 and P of FIG. 31A are a1 to a8 and p, respectively, the brightness value of the pixel of interest P in the edge image X is as follows using the coefficient for the edge image X. It is calculated by the formula 4 of.
Brightness of P (PX) = a1 × (-3) + a2 × 0 + a3 × 3 + a4 × (-10) + p × 0 + a5 × 10 + a6 × (-3) + a7 × 0 + a8 × 3 ... Equation (4)

The image recognition DSP circuit 242 creates an edge image X by calculating the brightness of all the pixels of the circular region image data after the 3σ correction process using the above equation 4.

FIG. 31C shows the coefficient for edge image Y. Here, when the brightness values of the pixels A1 to A8 and P of FIG. 31A are set to a1 to a8 and p, respectively, the brightness value of the pixel of interest P in the edge image Y is described below using the edge image Y coefficient. It is calculated by the formula 5 of.
Luminance of P (PY) = a1 × (-3) + a2 × (-10) + a3 × (-3) + a4 × 0 + P × 0 + a5 × 0 + a6 × 3 + a7 × 10 + a8 × 3 ... Equation (5)

The image recognition DSP circuit 242 creates an edge image Y by calculating the brightness of all the pixels of the circular region image data after the 3σ correction process using the above equation 5.

After creating the edge image X and the edge image Y, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 creates the edge image XY from both images. The brightness PXY of each pixel in the edge image XY is calculated by the following equation 6 when the value of the brightness of the pixel in the edge image X is PX and the value of the brightness of the pixel in the edge image Y at the same position is PY. be able to.

The image recognition DSP circuit 242 creates an edge image XY by calculating the brightness PXY using the above equation 6 for all the pixels of the edge image X and the edge image Y, and stores the created edge image XY in the SRAM 243. Let me.
The various determination processes performed by the image recognition DSP circuit 242 will be described later.

<Image recognition accelerator circuit>
The image recognition accelerator circuit 249 performs a process related to the gradient average image data, a process related to the edge gradient image, and a fast Fourier transform (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “FFT transform”) process. Further, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 performs a template generation process for creating various templates used for the stamp determination process.

[Processing related to gradient average image data]
The processing related to the gradient average image data includes a rotation image generation process and a gradient average image data generation process.

(1) Rotation image generation processing In the rotation image generation processing, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 acquires an edge image XY from SRAM 243 and rotates the acquired edge image XY in 1 degree units to obtain a 360 degree rotation image. Generate.

(2) Gradient average image data generation processing In the gradient average image data generation processing, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 cumulatively adds (superimposes) the 360-degree rotation images generated in the rotation image generation processing, and gradient averages. Generate image data. As an example of the gradient average image data, the gradient average image data of the regular medal shown in FIG. 32A is shown in FIG. 32B. Then, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 stores the generated gradient average image data in the SRAM 243.

[Processing related to edge gradient image]
The processing related to the edge gradient image includes a polar coordinate conversion processing, a Scharr conversion processing, and a HOG conversion processing.

(1) Polar Coordinate Conversion Process In the polar coordinate conversion process, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 acquires an edge image XY from SRAM 243, converts the orthogonal coordinates of the acquired edge image XY into polar coordinates, and creates polar coordinate image data. Specifically, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 expresses the Cartesian coordinates (x, y) of each pixel of the edge image XY by the length r of the moving diameter and the angle φ from the reference position (r, φ). ). The relationship between polar coordinates (r, φ) and Cartesian coordinates (x, y) is expressed by the following equations 7 and 8.
x ＝ r cos (φ) ・ ・ ・ Equation (7)
y ＝ r sin (φ) ・ ・ ・ Equation (8)

Then, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 stores the created polar coordinate image data in the SRAM 243.

(2) Scharr conversion process In the Scharr conversion process, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 acquires polar coordinate image data from SRAM 243 and creates an edge polar coordinate image X in the X (vertical) direction and an edge polar coordinate image Y in the Y (horizontal) direction. To do. Therefore, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 that performs the Scharr conversion process constitutes a directional image separating means that separates the polar coordinate image into a vertical image and a horizontal image.
Since the mode of creating the edge polar coordinate image X and the edge polar coordinate image Y in the Scharr conversion process is the same as the mode of creating the edge image X and the edge image Y in the above-described nonlinear diffusion filter process, the coefficients used are the same. The description is omitted here.

(3) HOG conversion processing In the HOG conversion processing, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 creates an edge gradient image and performs HOG conversion on the created edge gradient image. Here, the HOG (Histograms of Oriented Gradients) transformation is to make a histogram of the gradient direction of the brightness of a local region (cell) in the image data, and for image matching accompanied by the HOG transformation, a local shape change (local shape change (cell)). It is strong against geometric transformation) and is not easily affected by fluctuations in lighting.

Specifically, an edge gradient image is created from the edge polar coordinate image X and the edge polar coordinate image Y created by the Scharr transformation process. The brightness of each pixel in the edge gradient image, that is, the gradient intensity, is calculated by the following equation 9 when the brightness value of the pixel in the edge polar coordinate image X is QX and the brightness value of the pixel in the edge polar coordinate image Y at the same position is QY. Can be calculated by.

Further, the gradient angle of each pixel in the edge gradient image can be calculated by the following equation 10.

FIG. 33 schematically shows the created edge gradient image G4. The image recognition accelerator circuit 249 creates a histogram in the gradient direction of the brightness in the local region for each local region, using the rectangular frame S indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in the created edge gradient image G4 as a local region (cell). .. Then, the created histogram set (which may be referred to as "HOG data" in the following description) is stored in SRAM 243.

[FFT conversion process]
In the FFT conversion process, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 is created by the above-mentioned polar coordinate change process, acquires the polar coordinate image data stored in the SRAM 243, and performs the FFT conversion process on the acquired polar coordinate image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 divides the acquired polar coordinate image data into a plurality of regions, and calculates the frequency and amplitude values for each of the divided regions. The figure shows an example in which polar coordinate image data is partitioned at predetermined angles and the frequency and amplitude values are calculated for each of the partitioned regions.

Then, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 stores the calculated frequency and amplitude values (hereinafter, these may be referred to as “FFT data”) in the SRAM 243 with respect to the acquired polar coordinate image data.

[Template generation process]
The image recognition accelerator circuit 249 executes the template generation process to generate the present template. This template consists of a set of gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data. In the embodiment, a maximum of four types of the present template are generated. Further, this template is used in the determination process executed by the image recognition DSP circuit 242, which will be described later. The details of the template generation process will be described later.

<Judgment processing by image recognition DSP circuit>
Next, the determination process executed by the image recognition DSP circuit 242 will be described. The determination process is executed after the present template is generated and registered in the template generation process. The determination process includes a gradient average image template comparison process, a HOG template comparison process, an FFT template comparison process, and a three-dimensional determination process.

(1) Gradient Average Image Template Comparison Process In the gradient average image template comparison process, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 acquires the gradient average image data generated by the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 from the SRAM 243 for the inserted medals.

Next, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 compares the acquired gradient average image data with the gradient average image data of each of the present templates, and zero-mean normalized cross-correlation (Zero-mean Normalized Cross Correlation) in the following description. The evaluation value x of the degree of similarity is calculated by (sometimes referred to as “ZNCC”). The evaluation value of the similarity obtained by ZNCC is calculated in the range of −1.0000000 to 1.0000000, and 1.0000000 is the evaluation value having the highest degree of similarity (similarity).

(2) HOG template comparison process In the HOG template comparison process, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 acquires the HOG data of the inserted medals. Next, the acquired HOG data is compared with the HOG data of each template, and the evaluation value y of the similarity is calculated by ZNCC.

(3) FFT template comparison process In the FFT template comparison process, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 acquires the FFT data of the inserted medals. Next, the acquired FFT data is compared with the FFT data of each template, and the evaluation value z of the similarity is calculated by ZNCC.

(4) Three-dimensional determination process In the three-dimensional determination process, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 has the following equation consisting of the evaluation values x, y, z calculated in the above process and the preset coefficients A, C, D. If it is established, it is determined that the inserted medal and this template are the same.
x + Ay + Cz ≧ D ・ ・ ・ Equation (11)

In this embodiment, a maximum of four types of this template are created. The image recognition DSP circuit 242 performs a three-dimensional determination process for each of the present templates. If the above equation (11) does not hold for all of the present templates, it is determined that the medals to be determined are not regular medals. On the other hand, if there is one or more present templates in which the above equation (11) holds, it is determined that the medals to be determined are regular medals. Then, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 stores the "determination OK" indicating the "regular medal" or the "determination NG" indicating the "illegal medal" as the determination result in the SRAM 243. When the image recognition DSP circuit 242 stores the determination result, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 stores the above-mentioned image ID inherited by the data related to the determination and the determination result in association with each other.

<GPIO>
The GPIO 250 (see FIG. 18) is a device for input / output of each device connected to the medal selector 201 and the control LSI 234. Further, it is a device for input / output of the control LSI 234 and various devices constituting the medal selector 201.
For example, the LED control output PORT of the GPIO 250 is connected to the LED 233, and the control LSI 234 can control the lighting and extinguishing of the LED 233. Further, the notification LED control output PORT of the GPIO250 is connected to the notification LED 206c, and the control LSI 234 can control the lighting and extinguishing of the notification LED 206c. Further, the AE setting port of the GPIO 250 is connected to the CMOS image sensor 232, and the control LSI 234 can control the exposure time setting mechanism of the CMOS image sensor 232 (exposure time setting).

Further, the switch input PORT of the GPIO250 is connected to the initialization switch 206d, the color switch 206e, and the marking switch 206f, and the control LSI 234 can acquire the switch states of the initialization switch 206d, the color switch 206e, and the marking switch 206f. ing.

<UART>
The UART 252 is a serial communication device for transmitting and receiving various commands described later between the medal selector 201 and the sub control circuit 101 composed of the sub control board 72. In FIG. 18, the auxiliary relay board 61 is not shown.

<Host controller>
The host controller 241 controls each device constituting the control LSI 234, for example, a medal count circuit 246, a color recognition circuit 247, a fisheye correction scaler circuit 248, an image recognition DSP circuit 242, an image recognition accelerator circuit 249, GPIO250, and UART252. ..

Further, when the host controller 241 receives the determination result of the AE determination process from the ISP circuit 245, the host controller 241 first refers to the area in which the value of the exposure time stage is stored in the SRAM 243. Next, when the exposure time stage is set to "25", that is, the exposure time is not set to the upper limit of 175 μsec, the exposure time setting mechanism of the CMOS image sensor 232 is set via the AE setting PORT of the GPIO250. A signal indicating that the exposure time is increased by one step is output. Then, 1 is added to the value of the region in which the value of the exposure time stage is stored in the SRAM 243. In the present embodiment, since the initial value of the exposure time is set to 70 μsec, the initial value stored in the area where the value of the stage of the exposure time is stored is set to 10. That is, in the present embodiment, the host controller 241 of the control LSI 234 constitutes an exposure time setting means for setting the exposure time of the CMOS image sensor 232.

On the other hand, when the exposure time stage is set to "25", that is, the exposure time is set to the upper limit of 175 μsec, the host controller 241 instructs the notification LED 206c to light via the notification LED control output PORT of the GPIO250. Output the signal to be used. Further, the host controller 241 transmits a medal selector error command to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101). The value of DAT0 of the medal selector error command to be transmitted is set to "3" indicating "cleaning error". The details of the medal selector error command will be described later.

Further, the host controller 241 is pressed by an initialization switch (not shown) provided on a switch board (not shown) provided at an arbitrary location of the medal selector 201 (for example, in the vicinity of the first board 230). Then, the step of the exposure time is set to the initial value "10", that is, the exposure time is set to 70 μsec. As a result, for example, an employee of the game hall can reset the appropriate exposure time of the CMOS image sensor 232 by pressing the initialization switch after maintaining (cleaning, etc.) the lens of the camera unit 209. Become.

Further, the host controller 241 outputs a signal related to a lighting instruction or an extinguishing instruction to the LED 233 via the GPIO 250.
Further, signals related to the switch state from the initialization switch 206d, the color switch 206e, and the marking switch 206f are input to the host controller 241 via the GPIO250.
Further, the host controller 241 transmits a medal selector error command to the sub-control circuit 101 when "an abnormality has occurred" is stored in the SRAM 243 as a determination result related to the counting process. The value of DAT0 of the medal selector error command to be transmitted is set to "1" indicating "foreign matter detection error". The details of the medal selector error command will be described later.

Further, the host controller 241 responds to the determination result of the circular detection, the determination result of the color determination, and the determination result of the marking determination associated with the same image ID at the timing when the result of the marking determination processing is stored in the SRAM 243. The determination completion command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101. The details of the determination completion command will be described later.

A backup power supply (not shown) is connected to the SRAM 243, and the contents stored in the SRAM 243 are retained for a certain period (for example, about one week) even when the power supply of the pachislot 1 is turned off.

<Flash memory>
The flash memory 244 is required for parameters and various processes used by various devices constituting the control LSI 234, for example, a host controller 241, an image recognition DSP circuit 242, a fisheye correction scaler circuit 248, and an image recognition accelerator circuit 249. The data is stored. Further, the flash memory 244 is provided with an area for storing the value of the above-mentioned exposure time stage. Further, an area for storing the coefficients A, C, and D in the equation (11) is provided.

<Processing flow of control LSI>
Next, the processing performed by the control LSI 234 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a processing flow diagram for explaining the processing performed by the control LSI 234.
As shown in FIG. 35, the control LSI 234 is roughly divided into input processing, conversion processing, color determination processing, counting processing, and marking determination processing.

<Input processing>
The input process is performed by the ISI circuit 251. In the input process, as described above, the ISI circuit 251 converts the image data transmitted from the CMOS image sensor 232 in the LVDS method into an RGB Bayer image and outputs the image data to the ISP circuit 245.

<AE correction processing>
The AE correction process is performed by the ISP circuit 245 and the host controller 241 when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on. Further, the AE correction process is performed in parallel with the conversion process, the color determination process, and the count process, which will be described later.

In the AE correction process, the ISP circuit 245 determines whether or not the RGB bayer image output from the ISI circuit 251 includes an image of the ridge portion 210a (see FIG. 8) formed on the surface of the medal rail 210. Performs AE determination processing. Further, when the ISP circuit 245 determines that the output image does not include the image of the ridge portion 210a, the ISP circuit 245 outputs the determination result of this AE determination process to the host controller 241.

Further, in the AE correction process, when the determination result of the AE determination process is output from the ISP circuit 245, the host controller 241 first refers to the area in which the value of the exposure time stage is stored in the SRAM 243. Next, when the exposure time stage is set to "25", that is, the exposure time is not set to the upper limit of 175 μsec, the exposure time setting mechanism of the CMOS image sensor 232 is set via the AE setting PORT of the GPIO250. A control signal is output to instruct the exposure time to be increased by one step (extended by 7 μs). Then, 1 is added to the value of the region in which the value of the exposure time stage is stored in the SRAM 243.

By doing so, the image to which the ISP circuit 245 performs the AE determination processing next becomes an RGB Bayer image based on the image acquired by the CMOS image sensor 232 whose exposure time is increased by one step. The AE correction process is repeated until the ISP circuit 245 determines in the AE determination process that the image includes the image of the ridge portion 210a, or until the exposure time is set to the upper limit of 175 μsec.

When the ISP circuit 245 determines in the AE determination process that the image output from the ISI circuit 251 includes the image of the ridge portion 210a, the determination result of the AE determination process is not output to the host controller. Further, thereafter, the AE determination process is not performed on the image output from the ISI circuit 251. That is, the exposure time of the CMOS image sensor 232 is set to the exposure time when the ISP circuit 245 determines that the image output from the ISI circuit 251 includes the image of the ridge portion 210a. When the ISP circuit 245 determines that the image of the ridge portion 210a is included in the image first output from the ISI circuit 251 after the power is turned on, the exposure time of the CMOS image sensor 232 is set to the initial value. It takes 70 μsec (step 10).

In the AE correction process, when the determination result of the AE determination process is output from the ISP circuit 245, the host controller 241 sets the exposure time stage to "25", that is, when the exposure time is set to the upper limit of 175 μsec. The host controller 241 outputs a control signal instructing the notification LED 206c to light via the notification LED control output PORT of the GPIO250. Further, the host controller 241 transmits a medal selector error command in which the value “3” indicating “cleaning error” is set in DAT0 to the sub-control board 72.

In this way, when the host controller 241 outputs a control signal instructing the notification LED 206c to light up and sends a medal selector error command to the sub-control board 72, the exposure time is set to the upper limit of 175 μsec. This is a case where the ridge portion 210a of the medal rail 210 cannot be imaged even if it is set. In such a case, it is conceivable that some kind of obstacle (for example, dirt such as dust is attached to the lens) has occurred in the camera unit 209. Therefore, in this state, it is not possible to effectively detect the insertion of the game medal and the detection of fraudulent activity using the camera unit 209, so that the sub-control circuit 101 performs various processes for notifying the occurrence of the failure. In this embodiment, a C1 error screen, which will be described later, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Conversion process>
The conversion process is performed by the ISP circuit 245. In the conversion process, the ISP circuit 245 performs an image correction process of performing a lens distortion correction process and a projective transformation (homography) process on the RGB bayer image output from the ISI circuit 251. Next, the ISP circuit 245 performs a color conversion process of converting the corrected RGB bayer image into YUV image data and outputting the grayscale image data to the medal count circuit 246. Further, a color conversion process is performed in which the RGB bayer image is converted into HSV image data and the HSV image data is output to the color recognition circuit 247.

After the conversion process, the control LSI 234 performs a color determination process, a count process, and a stamp determination process. Since the circuits that execute each process are configured as separate circuits, these processes are executed in parallel at each feasible timing.

<Color judgment processing>
The color determination process is performed by the color recognition circuit 247. The color determination process includes a medal detection process, a threshold value determination process, a saturation / hue multiplication process, a color template generation process, and a color template comparison process.

First, the color recognition circuit 247 performs a medal detection process for determining whether or not the HSV image data output from the ISP circuit 245 includes an image of a medal. When it is determined that the HSV image data includes the image of the medal, the color recognition circuit 247 performs the threshold value determination process based on the HSV image data. In the threshold value determination process, if the position on the threshold graph (see FIG. 21) based on the average saturation value and the average hue value is within the allowable region, the color determination process is continued. On the other hand, if it is within the non-allowable area, "threshold value determination impossible" is stored in SRAM 243 as a determination result, and the color determination process is terminated.

After the threshold value determination process, the color recognition circuit 247 performs a saturation / hue multiplication process to create color determination data. Then, the created color determination data is compared with the color template, it is determined whether or not they match or are similar to a predetermined degree, and the determination result is stored in the SRAM 243. As described above, when the color recognition circuit 247 stores the color determination result (“determination OK” or “determination NG”) in the SRAM 243, the color recognition circuit 247 is associated with the above-mentioned image ID inherited by the data related to the determination. Remember.

Since the color template is not generated until the number of medals inserted after the power is turned on reaches the specified initial number of medals, 50 in this embodiment, the color template comparison process is not executed.

Further, in the color recognition circuit 247, when the number of medals inserted after the power is turned on reaches 50, which is the specified initial number of inserted medals, and the number of color determination data stored in the color determination data storage area reaches 50, that is, 50 medals. When the color determination data related to the medal is created, the color template generation process is executed.

<Count processing>
The counting process is performed by the medal counting circuit 246. The count process includes a medal detection process and an order determination process. The medal image detection process and the medal position detection process described above correspond to the medal detection process. In the medal detection process, the medal counting circuit 246 determines whether or not the image of the medal is included in the grayscale image data output from the ISP circuit 245. Further, it is determined whether or not the medal image exists in the predetermined determination area in the grayscale image data output from the ISP circuit 245, and the determination results (“IN”, “OUT”, “ON”, “OFF”) are determined. Data) is stored in SRAM 243.

In the order determination process, the medal count circuit 246 has a predetermined transition mode in which the data transitions of “IN”, “OUT”, “ON”, and “OFF” for each determination area stored in the SRAM 243 are defined. Determine if they match. Then, as the determination result, either "the medal has passed", "the medal has been guided by the medal shoot 202", or "an abnormality has occurred" is stored in the SRAM 243.

<Engraving judgment processing>
The marking determination process includes a fisheye correction process and an equalization process performed by the fisheye correction scaler circuit 248. Further, the circular region detection process, the filter process, the gradient average image template comparison process, the HOG template comparison process, the FFT template comparison process, and the three-dimensional determination process performed by the image recognition DSP circuit 242 are included. Further, the rotation image generation process, the gradient average image data generation process, the gradient average image template generation process, the polar coordinate conversion process, the Scharr conversion process, the HOG conversion process, the HOG template generation process, the FFT conversion process, which are performed by the image recognition accelerator circuit 249. The FFT template generation process is included.

In the fisheye correction process, the fisheye correction scaler circuit 248 acquires grayscale image data from SRAM 243 and performs fisheye correction processing for correcting the acquired grayscale image data. Next, in the equalization process, the fisheye correction scaler circuit 248 performs the equalization process on the grayscale image data that has undergone the fisheye correction process, creates reduced image data, and stores it in the SRAM 243.

The host controller 241 instructs the image recognition DSP circuit 242 and the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 to execute the processing after the circular area detection processing in the marking determination processing on the reduced image data stored in the SRAM 243.

In the circle area detection process, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 acquires the reduced image data from the SRAM 243 and detects the circle area from the reduced image data. As described above, when the circular region can be detected, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 associates "determination OK" as the determination result of circular detection with the above-mentioned image ID inherited by the data related to the determination. , It is stored in SRAM 243. If the circular area cannot be extracted (detected) in the circular area detection process, the subsequent processes in the stamp determination process are omitted.

Further, in the filter processing, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 performs the non-linear diffusion filter processing on the detected circular region to create an edge image XY, which is stored in the SRAM 243.

Next, in the rotation image generation process, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 acquires the edge image XY from the SRAM 243 and generates a rotation image for 360 degrees from the edge image XY. Further, in the gradient average image data generation process, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 cumulatively adds (superimposes) 360-degree rotation images to generate gradient average image data, and stores the gradient average image data in SRAM 243. Let me.

Next, when this template is registered, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 acquires the gradient average image data generated by the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 from the SRAM 243 in the gradient average image template comparison process. Then, the acquired gradient average image data is compared with the gradient average image data of each template, and the evaluation value x of the degree of similarity is calculated by ZNCC.
On the other hand, when this template is not registered, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 performs a gradient average image template generation process described later.

Further, in parallel with the rotation image generation process, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 performs a polar coordinate conversion process. In the polar coordinate conversion process, an edge image XY (same as the edge image XY acquired in the above rotation image generation process) is acquired from SRAM 243, and the orthogonal coordinates of the acquired edge image XY are converted into polar coordinates to create polar coordinate image data. Then, the polar coordinate image data is stored in the SRAM 243.

Next, in the Scharr conversion process, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 acquires polar coordinate image data from SRAM 243 and performs nonlinear diffusion filter processing to create an edge polar coordinate image X and an edge polar coordinate image Y.

Next, in the HOG conversion process, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 creates an edge gradient image based on the edge polar coordinate image X and the edge polar coordinate image Y, performs HOG conversion on the created edge gradient image, and performs HOG conversion for each local region. Create a histogram of the gradient direction of the brightness inside. Then, the created set of histograms (that is, HOG data) is stored in SRAM 243.

Next, when this template is registered, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 acquires the HOG data to be determined in the HOG template comparison process, and compares the acquired HOG data with the HOG data of each template. , ZNCC calculates the evaluation value y of the degree of similarity.
On the other hand, when this template is not registered, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 performs the HOG template generation process described later.

Further, in parallel with the Scharr conversion process, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 performs the FFT conversion process. In the FFT conversion process, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 acquires the polar coordinate image data from the SRAM 243 and performs the FFT conversion process on the acquired polar coordinate image data.

Next, when this template is registered, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 acquires the FFT data to be determined in the FFT template comparison process, and compares the acquired FFT data with the FFT data of each of the present templates. , ZNCC calculates the evaluation value z of the similarity.
On the other hand, when this template is not registered, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 performs the FFT template generation process described later.

After the evaluation values x, y, and z are calculated as a result of the gradient average image template comparison process, the HOG template comparison process, and the FFT template comparison process, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 performs a three-dimensional determination process, and the determination result is SRAM 243. Remember in. As described above, when the image recognition DSP circuit 242 stores the determination result, the above-mentioned image ID inherited by the data related to the determination and the determination result are stored in association with each other.

When the marking determination determination result is stored in the SRAM 243, the host controller 241 displays the circular detection determination result, the color determination determination result, and the marking determination determination result associated with the same image ID stored in the SRAM 243. The corresponding determination completion command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101.

[Template generation process]
Next, the template generation process performed by the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 will be described with reference to the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 36 and 37. 36 and 37 are flowcharts showing an example of the template generation process. The template generation process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle. The template generation process includes a gradient average image template generation process, a HOG template generation process, and an FFT template generation process shown in FIG. 35.

First, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted (S1). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the medal counting circuit 246 has determined that the grayscale image data output from the ISP circuit 245 includes the image of the medal. That is, it is confirmed whether or not the medal counting circuit 246 has started the counting process. When it is determined that the medal has been inserted (when the determination in S1 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 shifts the process to step S2. On the other hand, when it is determined that no medal has been inserted (when S1 is NO determination), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the template generation process.

In step S2, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 holds the temporary marking (S2). Specifically, the edge image created by the fisheye correction scaler circuit 248 and the image recognition DSP circuit 242 performing various processing on the grayscale image data determined by the medal counting circuit 246 to include the image of the medal. Using XY, gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data of the inserted medals are generated. Then, the set of these generated data is stored in the SRAM 243.

Next, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 determines whether or not the medal count is OK (S3). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the counting process by the medal counting circuit 246 whose start is confirmed in step S1 is "the medal has passed" on the medal rail 210 (S3). In step S3, when the medal count is not OK (when the determination result is not "the medal has passed", that is, when S3 is NO determination), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 discards the temporary marking (S4). That is, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 discards the gradient average image data, the HOG data, and the FFT data stored in the SRAM 243 in step S2. Then, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the template generation process.

On the other hand, in step S3, when the medal count is OK (when the determination result is "the medal has passed", that is, when step S3 is YES determination), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 has a temporary template. (S5). Specifically, the temporary template storage area of SRAM 243 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the temporary template (a set of gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data) is stored. Here, as the temporary template storage area in the present embodiment, the temporary template storage area No. is used so that 10 temporary templates (sets) can be stored. 1-No. 10 is set.

When it is determined that the temporary template is not stored (when the determination in S5 is NO), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 uses the gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data stored in the SRAM 243 in step S2 as the temporary template. Temporary template storage area No. 1-No. It is stored in the free area in 10, and the value of the cumulative counter of the temporary template corresponding to the free area No. is set to 1 (S6). In the following description, the temporary template storage area No. 1-No. The temporary template stored in each of 10 may be referred to as "temporary template No. 1 to No. 10". That is, for example, the temporary template storage area No. The temporary template stored in 1 may be referred to as "temporary template No. 1".

Next, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 counts the learning medals (S7). Specifically, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 adds 1 to the value of the learning medal counter provided in the SRAM 243.

Next, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 determines whether or not the value of the learning medal counter is 127 (S8). When the value of the learning medal counter is 127 (when the determination in S8 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 shifts the process to step S14, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the value of the learning medal counter is not 127 (when the determination in S8 is NO), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 determines whether or not the value of the learning medal counter is 259 (S9). When the value of the learning medal counter is 259 (when the determination in S9 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 shifts the process to step S16 described later. On the other hand, when the value of the learning medal counter is not 259 (when the determination in S9 is NO), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the template generation process.

Here, when the explanation is returned to step S5 and it is determined that the temporary template is stored (when the determination in S5 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 has the gradient average image data stored in the SRAM 243 in step S2. The HOG data and FFT data are the temporary template No. 1-No. It is determined whether or not it is the same as any of 10 (S10). That is, the inserted medal is the temporary template No. 1-No. It is determined whether it is the same as any of 10.

In this comparison, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 has the gradient average image data, the HOG data, the FFT data stored in the SRAM 243 in step S2, and the temporary template No. 1-No. The evaluation values x, y, and z of the similarity are calculated by comparing with 10 (gradient average image data, HOG data, FFT data). Specifically, the evaluation value x is calculated for the gradient average image data, the evaluation value y is calculated for the HOG data, and the evaluation value z is calculated for the FFT data by ZNCC. Then, when the above-mentioned equation (11) consisting of the calculated evaluation values x, y, z and the preset coefficients A, C, D is satisfied, the inserted medal and the provisional template are the same. Is determined.

In step S10, the medal inserted in step S2 is the temporary template No. 1-No. When it is determined that it is the same as any of 10 (when the determination in S10 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 shifts the process to step S11. In step S11, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 performs cumulative counting and update processing for the temporary template for which the above equation holds (that is, determined to be the same as the inserted medal) (S11).

Specifically, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 has a temporary template No. 1 in SRAM 243. 1-No. Among the cumulative counters provided for each ten, 1 is added to the value of the cumulative counter of the temporary template determined to be the same as the inserted medal in step S10. Further, regarding the gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data of the temporary template determined to be the same, each of these data and the gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data of the inserted medals stored in the SRAM 243 in step S2. Average and update each one. Then, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 shifts the process to step S7.

On the other hand, in step S10, the medal inserted because the equation (11) does not hold is the temporary template No. 1-No. When it is determined that none of the 10 is the same (when the determination in S10 is NO), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 shifts the process to step S12. In step S12, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 determines whether or not there are 10 temporary templates (S12). Specifically, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 has a temporary template storage area No. 1-No. 10 is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the temporary template is stored in all of them.

Temporary template storage area No. 1-No. When the temporary template is not stored in all of 10 (when the determination in S12 is NO), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 shifts the process to step S6. Then, in step S6, the gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data stored in the SRAM 243 in step S2 are used as temporary templates, and the temporary template storage area No. 1-No. Store in the free area of 10.

On the other hand, the temporary template storage area No. 1-No. When the temporary template is stored in all of 10 (when the determination in S12 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 shifts the process to step S13. In step S13, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 discards the gradient average image data, the HOG data, and the FFT data stored as the lowest temporary template. (S13). In addition, the cumulative count value of the discarded temporary template No. is set to 0. Then, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 shifts the process to step S6. In the transitioned step S6, the gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data stored in the SRAM 243 in step S2 are stored as temporary templates. That is, the gradient average image data, the HOG data, and the FFT data stored in the SRAM 243 in step S2 are stored so as to be replaced with the temporary template discarded in S13.

Here, the explanation is returned to step S8, and when the value of the learning medal counter is 127 (when the determination in S8 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 has one type or two temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more. It is determined whether it is a type (S14). When it is determined that there is not one or two types of temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more (NO in step S14), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the template generation process. The case where there is not one type or two types of temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more is a case where there are 0 or 3 types or more of temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there are one or two types of temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more (when the determination in step S14 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 uses a temporary template having a cumulative counter of 10 or more. , Register in this template and discard other temporary templates stored in the temporary template storage area (S15). Here, registration in the present template means that the temporary template having a cumulative counter of 10 or more is stored in the present template storage area set in the SRAM 243, that is, the generation of the template is completed. Then, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the template generation process. In the following description, the temporary template stored in the template storage area may be referred to as "this template".

Here, the explanation is returned to step S9, and when the value of the learning medal counter is 259 (when the determination in S9 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 has 0 types of temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more. (S16). When it is determined that there are 0 types of temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more (when the determination in S16 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 shifts the process to step S20, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more is not 0 (when the determination in S16 is NO), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 has 5 or more types of temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more. Whether or not it is determined (S17). When it is determined that the number of temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more is not 5 or more (when S17 is determined to be NO, that is, when there are 1 to 4 types of temporary templates having 10 or more), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 is cumulative. A temporary template having a counter value of 10 or more is registered in this template, and other temporary templates stored in the temporary template storage area are discarded (S18). Then, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the template generation process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there are 5 or more types of temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more (YES in S17), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 has the cumulative counter values of the top 4 and 5. For the temporary template, it is determined whether or not the values of the cumulative counters are equal (S19). When the cumulative counter values are not equal (when 19 is NO determination), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 registers four types of temporary templates with cumulative counter values from the top 1 to 4 in this template, and provisionally registers them. Other temporary templates stored in the template storage area are discarded (S21). Then, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the template generation process.

In step S16, when it is determined that there are 0 types of temporary templates having a cumulative counter value of 10 or more (when S16 is a YES determination) and in step S19, when it is determined that the cumulative counter values are equal (S19 is YES). (In the case of determination), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 requests the host controller 241 to transmit a medal selector error command (S20). The host controller 241 transmits a medal selector error command in response to the request. The value of DAT0 of this medal selector error command is set to "5" indicating "engraving template generation error". The details of the medal selector error command will be described later.
Then, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the template generation process.

[This template update process]
Next, the template update process performed by the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the template update process. This template update process is executed every time the image recognition DSP circuit 242 performs the three-dimensional determination process.

First, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 determines whether or not the determination result of the three-dimensional determination process of the image recognition DSP circuit 242 is a "regular medal", that is, whether or not the determination is OK (S31). When the determination result is not a "regular medal", that is, when "determination is NG" (when S31 is a NO determination), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the template update process.

On the other hand, when the determination result is "regular medal", that is, when "determination is OK" (when S31 is YES determination), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 sets 1 to the value of the regular medal counter set in SRAM 243. Add (S32).

Next, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 determines whether or not the value of the regular medal counter is 4 (S33). When the value of the regular medal counter is not 4 (when the determination in S33 is NO), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the template update process.

On the other hand, when the value of the regular medal counter is 4 (when the determination in S33 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 performs the template update process (S34). Specifically, in the latest three-dimensional determination process, the gradient average image data, HOG data, and HOG data of the inserted medals are added to the gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data of this template for which the equation (11) is established. Synthesize FFT data. In the present embodiment, the gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data of the inserted medals are combined with the gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data of this template with a weighted average of 1/256. The weighting of the inserted medal gradient average image data, HOG data, and FFT data is not limited to 1/256, and can be set arbitrarily. Further, in the present embodiment, the method of synthesizing by weighted average has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and synthesis may be performed by simple averaging or exponential averaging.

After step S34, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 clears the regular medal counter and ends the template update process.
If there are a plurality of templates for which the formula (11) is satisfied, the template for which the value calculated by x + Ay + Cz has the largest value is updated. For example, when two of the templates A and B are registered as the template, the value of x + Ay + Cz when the inserted medals are compared with the present template A is 2.4, and the inserted medals are used as the book. If the value of x + Ay + Cz when compared with the template B is 2, this template A is updated.

According to the template generation process (see FIGS. 36 and 37) described above, for example, when two types of medals having different markings (patterns) on the front and back are used as regular medals, the front and back of these two types of medals are used. It is possible to generate such four types of templates. When there is only one type of regular medal, two types of templates related to the front and back of the regular medal can be generated.

[Coefficient update processing]
Next, the coefficient update process performed by the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the coefficient update process. The coefficient update process is a process for updating the values of the coefficients A, C, and D in the equation (11). The coefficient update process is executed every time the image recognition DSP circuit 242 performs the three-dimensional determination process.

First, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 determines whether or not the determination result of the three-dimensional determination process of the image recognition DSP circuit 242 is "determination OK" (S41). When the determination result is not "determination OK" (when S41 is NO determination), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the coefficient update process.

On the other hand, when the determination result is "determination OK" (when the determination in S41 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 adds 1 to the value of the update medal counter set in the SRAM 243 (S42).

Next, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 accumulates the results of template comparison (S43). Specifically, the average value of the evaluation values x, y, and z when the determination is "OK" in the three-dimensional determination process and the standard deviation are calculated. Then, the calculated average values and standard deviations of x, y, and z are stored in a predetermined area of the SRAM 243.

Next, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 determines whether or not the value of the update medal counter is a predetermined value (S44). In the present embodiment, the predetermined value is set to, for example, 500, 1000, and thereafter a multiple of 1000 (for example, 2000, 3000, 4000).

When the value of the update medal counter is not a predetermined value (when the determination in S44 is NO), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the coefficient update process. On the other hand, when the value of the update medal counter is a predetermined value (when the determination in S44 is YES), the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 updates the threshold value.

Here, the method of updating the threshold value will be described by taking as an example when the value of the update medal counter is 500, that is, when the number of regular medals inserted after the template is generated reaches 500. First, paying attention to the evaluation value x and the evaluation value y, when x + Ay ≧ B is satisfied, it is considered that the medal is determined to be a regular medal. In this case, for 500 medals that are inserted after the template is generated and are judged to be regular medals, the average of x is "μx", the standard deviation is "σx", the average of y is "μy", and the standard deviation is "σy". , The value of x on the threshold line when y = 1 is given by the following equation.
x1 = μx−σx × kx ・ ・ ・ Equation (12)

Further, the value of y on the threshold straight line when x = 1 is given by the following equation.
y1 = μy−σy × ky ・ ・ ・ Equation (13)
In addition, k is a constant determined separately, for example, 12α.

The coefficients A and B can be obtained by the following equations by the above equations (12) and (13).
A = (x1-1) / (y1-1)
B = x1 + A

Next, using the coefficient A obtained above, the coefficients C and D in the equation (11) x + Ay + Cz ≧ D are similarly obtained.
Here, when x + Ay = w and w + Cz ≧ D, the average of z is set to “μz” and the standard deviation of z is set to “σz” for 500 medals that are inserted after template generation and are judged to be regular medals. Then, the value of z on the threshold line when w = 1 is given by the following equation.
z1 = μz−σz × kz ・ ・ ・ Equation (14)

Further, the value of w on the threshold straight line when z = 1 is given by the following equation.
w1 = μw-σw × kW ・ ・ ・ Equation (15)
It should be noted that μw = μx + Aμy and σw = σx + Aσy.

From the above equations (14) and (15), C and D can be obtained by the following equations.
C = (w1-1) / (z1-1) ... Equation (16)
D = w1 + C ... Equation (17)

Here, in FIG. 40, x1, y1, and z1 are shown in a three-dimensional graph. In FIG. 40, the thick line connecting x1, y1 and z1 shows the outline of the threshold plane. In FIG. 40, in the space surrounded by the threshold plane and the broken line, the portion far from the origin (the portion in front of FIG. 40, indicated by shading) is the evaluation value x, as a result of comparison with this template. When the points indicated by y and z are included (that is, when the determination result is OK in the three-dimensional determination process), the inserted medal is determined to be a regular medal. That is, in the present embodiment, the evaluation value x, is set between the threshold plane formed by x1, y1, z1 calculated by the above equations (12) to (14) and the determination reference coordinates (1,1,1). A determination method for determining whether or not y and z are included is called a three-dimensional determination process. In FIG. 40, the space of the coordinates (0,0,0) to (-1, -1, -1) is not shown for convenience.

Next, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 updates the stored coefficients A, C, D of the flash memory 244 to the calculated coefficients A, C, D (S46). Then, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 ends the coefficient update process.

[Cover open detection process]
Next, the cover open detection process performed by the medal count circuit 246 will be described.
As described above, the medal selector 201 is fixed with a cover member 240 that covers the rear side of the pachislot 1 of the medal selector 201 in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 7). When the cover member 240 is set to the open state in which the rear side of the pachislot 1 in the medal selector 201 is exposed in the front-rear direction, the cover member 240 is on the medal rail 210 as compared with the case where the cover member 240 is set to the closed state to cover the rear side of the pachislot 1. In addition, extra light hits. This may adversely affect the marking determination process performed by the medal selector 201, resulting in a decrease in determination accuracy. Further, in normal operation, the cause of the cover member 240 being opened is an improper attachment of the cover member 240 during maintenance of the medal selector 201, or a goto action on the medal selector 201 (for example, a credit full goto). Can be considered.

Therefore, the medal count circuit 246 of the present embodiment performs a cover open detection process for detecting that the cover member 240 is in the open state. Here, in the grayscale image, the change in the brightness related to the passage of the medal may be similar to the change in the brightness when the medal rail 210 is exposed to extra light. Therefore, in this process, the medal count circuit 246 has a determination result of "ON" in a plurality of determination areas, for example, determination areas A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1, C2, and D1 to D4 (see FIG. 22). When the state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), it is determined that the cover member 240 is in the open state. Then, the determination result is output to the host controller 241. When the host controller 241 detects the determination result, it transmits a medal selector error command to the sub-control circuit 101. In addition, "2" indicating "cover opening error" is set in DAT0 of this medal selector error command. The details of the medal selector error command will be described later.

The sub-control circuit 101 executes a medal selector error command in which "2" indicating a "cover opening error" is set in DAT0, and a cover opening error notification process. Here, the cover opening error notification process is a process of displaying the C1 error screen described later on the liquid crystal display device 11. As a result, a person who sees the notification screen, for example, an employee of the game hall, can grasp that the cover member 240 is in the open state.

In the present embodiment, in the cover open detection process, the determination result is “ON” for a predetermined time in the determination areas A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1, C2, D1 to D4 (see FIG. 22). In this case, the mode of determining that the cover is open has been described. However, a plurality of determination areas of interest in the cover open detection process can be appropriately set. However, in the case of a medal jam, there are areas (for example, A2 and D4) that do not turn "ON" at the same time when one medal passes without any problem so that it is not mistakenly determined that the cover is open. Is desirable.

<Commands sent and received between the medal selector and the sub control circuit>
Here, with reference to FIG. 41, commands transmitted and received between the medal selector and the sub-control circuit will be described. FIG. 41 is a list of commands transmitted and received between the medal selector and the sub-control circuit.

[Command sent by medal selector]
First, a command transmitted by the medal selector 201 to the sub-control circuit 101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the command includes a start completion command, a determination completion command, a medal selector error command, a medal selector no operation command, an ACK command, and a NAK command. Each command is configured to include a 2-byte transmission counter (CNT) and a parameter consisting of DAT0 to DAT6. In this embodiment, DAT0 to DAT6 are 1 byte (bit 0 to bit 7) of data, respectively. Further, the data length of various commands is set to 9 bytes including the transmission counter, and this data length can be set as appropriate.

The initial value of the transmission counter (CNT) in the command transmitted by the medal selector 201 is set to the number of times the medal selector 201 is activated. The value of this transmission counter is incremented by 1 each time the medal selector 201 transmits a command to the sub-control circuit 101.

[Startup complete command]
The activation completion command is transmitted after the power is turned on to the medal selector 201 and the activation process is completed. The value of bit 0 of DAT0 of the start completion command indicates whether or not initialization has been performed. “0” indicates “without initialization”, and “1” indicates “with initialization”. Here, when the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 201 is initialized while the power is on, the value of the activation initialization flag storage area of the flash memory 244 is set to "1". Then, when the power is turned on and the start-up completion command is transmitted, the control LSI 234 refers to the start-up initialization flag storage area of the flash memory 244, and depending on the stored value, sets the start-up completion command DAT0. Set the value of bit 0. When the value of bit 0 of DAT0 of the activation completion command is "1", that is, when "1" is set in the value of the initialization flag storage area for activation at startup, the medal selector 201 is transmitted from the sub-control circuit 101. Upon receiving the ACK command for the startup completion command, the control LSI 234 sets the value of the startup initialization flag storage area to "0".

Further, the value of bit 1 of DAT0 of the activation completion command indicates whether the color determination is valid or invalid at the time of command transmission. A value "0" indicates "color determination invalid", and a value "1" indicates "color determination valid". When "color judgment is valid", it means that the color template has been created at the time of command transmission and the color switch at startup is in the ON state. In other cases, "color judgment is invalid". Further, the value of bit 2 of DAT0 of the activation completion command indicates whether the marking determination is valid or invalid at the time of command transmission. A value "0" indicates "engraving determination invalid", and a value "1" indicates "engraving determination valid". When "engraving judgment is valid", it means that the engraving template has been created at the time of command transmission and the engraving switch at startup is in the ON state. In other cases, "stamp judgment is invalid".

DAT1 of the start completion command indicates the ON / OFF state of various switches at the time of command transmission. The value of bit 0 indicates the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch, the value of bit 1 indicates the ON / OFF state of the color switch, and the value of bit 2 indicates the ON / OFF state of the marking switch. In any bit, "0" indicates "OFF state" and "1" indicates "ON state".

[Judgment completion command]
The determination completion command includes a transmission counter (CNT) and parameters indicating a determination result of circular detection, a determination result of color determination, and a determination result of marking determination. The value of DAT0 of the determination completion command indicates the determination result of circular detection, the value of DAT1 indicates the determination result of color determination, and the value of DAT2 indicates the determination result of marking determination. In any bit, "0" indicates "NG" (that is, "determination NG"), and "1" indicates "OK" (that is, "determination OK").

[Medal Selector Error Command]
The medal selector error command is transmitted when the medal selector 201 detects various errors. This command includes a transmission counter (CNT) and a parameter indicating the type of error occurring during command transmission. The value of DAT0 of the medal selector error command is set to 0-6. “0” indicates “no error”, “1” indicates “foreign matter detection error”, and “2” indicates “cover opening error”. Further, "3" indicates "cleaning error", "4" indicates "color template generation error", "5" indicates "engraving template generation error", and "6" indicates "CMOS hard error". Is shown. When various errors are detected, the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 201 stores the error contents (1 to 6) in the error storage area (initial value "0") provided in the SRAM 243. The content of the error stored in the SRAM 243 is deleted when the medal selector 201 receives an error release command described later from the sub-control circuit 101 (the initial value "0" is stored).

[Medal selector no operation command]
The medal selector non-operation command is periodically transmitted from the medal selector 201 to the sub-control circuit 101. The medal selector non-operation command includes a transmission counter (CNT).
Further, the value of bit 0 of DAT0 of the medal selector non-operation command indicates whether or not the initialization has been performed. “0” indicates “without initialization”, and “1” indicates “with initialization”. Here, when the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 201 is initialized while the power is on, the value of the non-operation initialization flag storage area of the SRAM 243 is set to "1". Then, when transmitting the medal selector non-operation command, the control LSI 234 refers to the non-operation initialization flag storage area of the SRAM 243, and according to the stored value, bit 0 of the DAT0 of the medal selector non-operation command. Set the value of. When the value of bit 0 of DAT0 of the medal selector non-operation command is "1", that is, when the value of the initialization flag storage area for no operation is set to "1", the medal selector 201 is transmitted from the sub-control circuit 101. Upon receiving the ACK command for the medal selector non-operation command, the control LSI 234 sets the value of the non-operation initialization flag storage area to "0".

The other medal selector non-operation commands DAT0 and DAT1 are the same as those of the activation completion command DAT0 and DAT1, so the description thereof is omitted here. Further, the content of the error storage area (value of any of 0 to 6) of the SRAM 243 described above is set in DAT3 of the medal selector non-operation command. The content is the same as DAT0 of the medal selector error command.

The values of DAT3 and DAT4 of the medal selector non-operation command indicate the number of times the medal selector 201 is activated. The number of activations is stored in the flash memory 244, and 1 is added to the number of activations each time the medal selector 201 is activated. Specifically, the medal selector 201 has a control power supply management unit (not shown), and the control power supply management unit starts supplying a power supply voltage (power on) to the medal selector 201 and sets a preset voltage value. Is exceeded, a reset signal is output to the control LSI 234. The control LSI 234 adds 1 to the number of activations based on the input of the reset signal. The medal selector 201 (control LSI 234) sets the values of DAT3 and DAT4 by referring to the number of times the flash memory 244 is activated when the medal selector non-operation command is transmitted. The number of activations is initialized to the initial value "0" by the initialization process performed by the control LSI 234 by the operation of the initialization switch 206d described above.

[ACK command, NAK command]
The ACK command is transmitted when the medal selector 201 can normally receive the command transmitted from the sub-control circuit 101. The NAK command is transmitted when the medal selector 201 cannot normally receive the command transmitted from the sub-control circuit 101. The ACK command and the NAK command include a transmission counter (CNT). Further, the values of DAT0 and DAT1 of the ACK command and the NAK command indicate the values of the transmission counter included in the command transmitted from the sub-control circuit 101.

[Command sent by sub-control circuit]
Next, a command transmitted by the sub-control circuit 101 to the medal selector 201 will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, the command includes an error release command, an input state command, an ACK command, and a NAK command. Each command is configured to include a 2-byte transmission counter (CNT) and a parameter consisting of DAT0 to DAT6. In the present embodiment, each of DAT0 to DAT6 is 1 byte (bit 0 to bit 7) of data. Further, the data length of various commands is set to 9 bytes including the transmission counter, and this data length can be set as appropriate.

The initial value of the transmission counter (CNT) in the command transmitted by the sub-control circuit 101 is set to a random number acquired when the command is first transmitted after the sub-control circuit 101 is activated. In addition, in order to generate this random number, a dedicated random number generation process (soft random number) for generating this random number or a device may be provided, and a random number generation for generating a random number used when determining the mode of production may be provided. Processing or the device may be used.

[Error release command]
The error release command is transmitted when the error release condition generated in the medal selector 201 is satisfied in the medal selector command transmission process (see FIG. 59) described later. However, the establishment of the error cancellation condition is not whether or not the error generated in the medal selector 201 is actually canceled, but whether or not the condition for transmitting the error cancellation command is satisfied.

[Input status command]
The insertion state command is transmitted in a predetermined cycle or in a medal selector command transmission process (see FIG. 59) described later. The value of DAT0 of the insertion state command indicates whether or not the medal can be accepted. "1" indicates "acceptable" and "0" indicates "acceptable".

[ACK command, NAK command]
The ACK command is transmitted when the sub-control circuit 101 can normally receive the command transmitted from the medal selector 201. The NAK command is transmitted when the sub-control circuit 101 cannot normally receive the command transmitted from the medal selector 201. The ACK command and the NAK command include a transmission counter. Further, the values of DAT0 and DAT1 of the ACK command and the NAK command indicate the values of the transmission counter included in the command transmitted from the medal selector 201.

<Command transmission / reception sequence between the medal selector and the sub control circuit>
Next, an example of a command transmission / reception sequence between the medal selector and the sub-control circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining an example of a command transmission / reception sequence between the medal selector and the sub-control circuit.

When the power is turned on to the pachislot 1 and the medal selector 201 and the sub-control circuit 101 are activated, the medal selector 201 transmits a activation completion command to the sub-control circuit 101. At this time, when the number of activations stored in the flash memory 244 is "10", the value of the transmission counter (CNT) included in the activation completion command is "10".

Subsequently, the sub-control circuit 101 that has normally received the activation completion command transmits an ACK command to the medal selector 201. The value of the transmission counter included in this ACK command is a random number value acquired at the time of transmission, for example, "256". Further, the values of DAT0 and DAT1 of this ACK command are "10", which is the value of the transmission counter included in the received activation completion command.

Subsequently, in the example shown in FIG. 42, the medal selector 201 transmits a medal selector no operation command to the sub-control circuit 101. The value of the transmission counter included in this medal selector non-operation command is "11", which is the initial value "10" plus one.

Subsequently, the sub-control circuit 101 that has normally received the medal selector non-operation command transmits an ACK command to the medal selector 201. The value of the transmission counter included in this ACK command is "257", which is the initial value "256" plus one. Further, the values of DAT0 and DAT1 of this ACK command are "11", which is the value of the transmission counter included in the received medal selector non-operation command.

Subsequently, in the example shown in FIG. 42, the sub-control circuit 101 transmits the insertion state command to the medal selector 201. The value of the transmission counter included in this input state command is "258", which is obtained by adding 1 to "257". Here, when the medal selector is rebooted (restarted) for some reason and the ACK command for the input status command is transmitted after the restart, the transmission counter included in this ACK command becomes the initial value again. In this case, since the number of activations is "11", the transmission counter included in the ACK command is "11".

In the present embodiment, when the sub-control circuit 101 receives the ACK command from the medal selector 201, the value of the transmission counter included in the received ACK command is included in the command received from the medal selector 201 last time. It is determined whether or not it is equal to the value obtained by adding "1" to the value of the transmission counter. If it is determined that they are not equal, the error information history area provided in the sub RAM 103 contains "CMOS CNT" (hereinafter, may be referred to as "ACK count error") as the error content, and the current date as the occurrence date and time. And memorize the time.

In the example shown in FIG. 42, the value of the transmission counter included in the received ACK command is "11". Further, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value "11" of the transmission counter included in the medal selector non-operation command, which is the command received from the medal selector 201 last time, is "12". Therefore, the sub CPU 102 determines that these values are not equal. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 stores "CMOS CNT" (ACK count error) as the error content and the current date and time as the occurrence date and time in the error information history area provided in the sub RAM 103.
Further, the medal selector 201 transmits a command to the sub-control circuit 101 at a cycle of 500 msec. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 42, the medal selector non-operation command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101 500 msec after the activation completion command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101. The cycle for transmitting commands from the medal selector 201 to the sub-control circuit 101 can be appropriately set.

<Various processing performed by the sub control circuit>
Next, various processes performed by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 60.

[Power-on process]
The power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on process. The sub CPU 102 performs a power-on process when the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on.
In the power-on process, the sub CPU 102 first performs an initialization process (S101). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 initializes each driver and starts the kernel (kernel or operating system).

Next, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to (the value of) the sub power-on counter provided in the sub RAM 103 (S102). Specifically, the sub-control circuit 101 has a sub-control power supply management unit (not shown), and the sub-control power supply management unit starts supplying a power supply voltage (power on) to the sub-control circuit 101 and sets it in advance. When the voltage value exceeds the value, a reset signal is output to a reset terminal (not shown) of the sub CPU 102. The sub CPU 102 adds 1 to (the value of) the sub power-on counter based on the input of the reset signal. The sub power-on counter receives a start-up completion command in which the medal selector 201 is initialized and the sub-control circuit 101 is initialized from the medal selector 201 (1 is set in bit 0 of DAT0). Is cleared (0 is set).
Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the power-on process.

[Processing when no operation command is received]
The non-operation command reception processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of receiving a non-operation command. When the sub-CPU 102 receives the non-operation command from the main control circuit 91, the sub CPU 102 performs the non-operation command reception processing.

Here, the commands transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 include an error command, a start command, a winning operation command, a medal insertion command, and a non-operation command.

The error command is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 when the main control circuit 91 detects an error. The error command includes, for example, parameters indicating the contents of various errors detected by the main control circuit 91. The start command is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 when the main control circuit 91 detects the operation of the player's start lever 23.

The winning operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 at a predetermined timing. The winning operation command includes, for example, parameters indicating the type of display combination, the flag related to the lock effect, the number of medals to be paid out, and the like. By receiving the winning operation command, the sub-control circuit 101 can recognize the symbol combination displayed along the winning determination line, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects. ..

The medal insertion command is transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 when the re-game is activated or when the player inserts the medal (pressing the BET button 22 or inserting the medal into the medal insertion slot 21). The medal insertion command includes the number of medals inserted and the credit insertion counter described later.

The non-operation command is transmitted when the main CPU 93 does not transmit all commands other than the above-mentioned non-operation command in the interrupt process executed every predetermined time (for example, 1.1173 ms). The non-operation command includes information indicating the pressed state of various buttons (BET button 22 and stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R, etc.) and whether the medal solenoid 208 is set to the ON state or the OFF state. It is included. It also contains information indicating whether the reset switch, which will be described later, is in the ON state or the OFF state.

In the non-operation command reception processing, the sub CPU 102 stores (stores) various parameters of the non-operation command received in the non-operation command storage area of the sub RAM 103 (S111). As a result, the sub CPU 102 can execute various processes according to the stored parameters. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the non-operation command reception processing.

[Medal Selector Communication Task]
The medal selector communication task will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the medal selector communication task. The sub CPU 102 executes the medal selector communication task after the power-on process.

In the medal selector communication task, first, the sub CPU 102 performs a 10 msec cycle wait process (S121). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 does not shift the process to step S122 until 10 msec elapses after the process shifts to step S121, and shifts the process to step S122 after 10 msec has elapsed. That is, the processing after step S122 of the medal selector communication task is performed every 10 msec.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is received data in the medal selector reception buffer (S122). The medal selector reception buffer is provided in the sub RAM 103, and temporarily stores various commands and data transmitted from the medal selector 201 to the sub control circuit 101.

When it is determined in step S122 that there is no received data in the medal selector reception buffer (when the determination in S122 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S121. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S122 that there is received data in the medal selector reception buffer (when the determination in S122 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the medal selector command reception process (S123). In the medal selector command reception process, the sub CPU 102 executes various processes according to the command received from the medal selector 201. Details of the medal selector command reception process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the medal selector command transmission process (S124). In the medal selector command transmission process, the sub CPU 102 transmits various commands to the medal selector 201. Details of the medal selector command transmission process will be described later. After step S124, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S121.

[Medal selector command reception processing]
The medal selector command reception process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the medal selector command reception process.
In the medal selector command reception process, the sub CPU 102 first determines whether or not the command received from the medal selector 201 is an activation completion command (S131).

If it is determined in step S131 that the received command is a start-up complete command (YES in S131), the sub CPU 102 performs a start-up complete command reception process (S132). The details of the processing at the time of receiving the start completion command will be described later. After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command reception process, and returns the process to step S124 of the medal selector communication task (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S131 that the received command is not the activation completion command (NO determination in S131), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the command received from the medal selector 201 is the determination completion command (S133). ).

When it is determined in step S133 that the received command is the determination completion command (when the determination in S133 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs the determination completion command reception processing (S134). The details of the processing at the time of receiving the determination completion command will be described later. After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command reception process, and returns the process to step S124 of the medal selector communication task (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S133 that the received command is not the determination completion command (NO determination in S133), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command received from the medal selector 201 is a medal selector error command (when it is determined that the command is not a medal selector error command). S135).

When it is determined in step S135 that the received command is a medal selector error command (when the determination in S135 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a medal selector error command reception processing (S136). The details of the medal selector error command reception processing will be described later. After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command reception process, and returns the process to step S124 of the medal selector communication task (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, in step S135, when it is determined that the received command is not a medal selector error command (when S135 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the command received from the medal selector 201 is an ACK or NAK command. (S137).

If it is determined in step S137 that the received command is an ACK or NAK command (YES in S137), the sub CPU 102 performs ACK / NAK command reception processing (S138). In the processing at the time of receiving the ACK / NAK command, various processes are performed according to the received ACK / NAK command. As an example of various processes, when an ACK command for an error release command described later is received from the medal selector 201, the liquid crystal display device 11 is instructed to end the display of the C1 error screen (see FIG. 54). The above-mentioned ACK count error may be registered in the error information history. After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command reception process, and returns the process to step S124 of the medal selector communication task (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S137 that the received command is not ACK or NAK (when S137 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command received from the medal selector 201 is a medal selector non-operation command. (S139).

When it is determined in step S139 that the received command is a medal selector non-operation command (YES in S139), the sub CPU 102 performs a medal selector non-operation command reception processing (S140). The details of the processing when the medal selector non-operation command is received will be described later. After that, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command reception process, and returns the process to step S124 of the medal selector communication task (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S139 that the received command is not a medal selector non-operation command (NO determination in S139), the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command reception process and performs the process in the medal selector communication task (FIG. FIG. Return to step S124 of (see 45).

[Processing when a startup completion command is received]
The processing at the time of receiving the start completion command will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of receiving the activation completion command.
In the process at the time of receiving the start completion command, the sub CPU 102 first acquires the setting information from the reception buffer and saves it (S141). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 uses DAT0 (presence / absence of initialization, valid / invalid of color determination / engraving determination) of the activation completion command received from the medal selector 201 stored in the reception buffer as setting information of the sub RAM 103. Store in the setting information storage area.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the setting information saved in step S141 includes information indicating that there is initialization (S142). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the value of the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the sub RAM 103, and determines whether or not the value of bit 0 is 1 (with initialization).

When it is determined in step S142 that the saved setting information does not include the information indicating that the initialization has been performed (when the determination in S142 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S144 described later.
On the other hand, in step S142, when it is determined that the saved setting information includes information indicating that initialization has been performed (when the determination in S142 is YES), the sub CPU 102 makes an initialization error screen display request (S143). ). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 instructs the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the initialization error screen.

Upon receiving the instruction, the liquid crystal display device 11 causes the display unit 11a to display an initialization error screen as shown in FIG. 48. In the present embodiment, on the initialization error screen, the character string "Selector has been initialized" is displayed in the lower right corner when the game machine is viewed from the front.

When it is determined that the saved setting information does not include the information indicating that the initialization is performed (when the determination in S142 is NO) after the step S143 or in the step S142, the sub CPU 102 performs the process of the step S144. Do. In step S144, the sub CPU 102 acquires the switch information from the receive buffer. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 acquires DAT1 (ON / OFF state of various switches) of the activation completion command received from the medal selector 201 stored in the reception buffer.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the switch information in the first switch information storage area and the switch information acquired in step S144 match (S145). Here, the first switch information storage area is allocated to the backup area of the sub RAM 103. In the first switch information storage area, when there is a change between the switch information at the time of the previous startup and the switch information at the time of the current startup in step S147 described later, the switch information at the time of the current startup is stored. ..

When it is determined in step S145 that they match (when the determination in S145 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S148, which will be described later. On the other hand, in step S145, when it is determined that they do not match (when S145 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 makes a selector switch error screen display request (S146). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 instructs the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the selector switch error screen.

Upon receiving the instruction, the liquid crystal display device 11 causes the display unit 11a to display a selector switch error screen as shown in FIG. 49. In the present embodiment, on the selector switch error screen, the character string "Selector switch has been changed" is displayed at the lower right when the game machine is viewed from the front. Further, a character string indicating an ON / OFF state of the color switch and the engraving switch is displayed according to the switch information acquired in step S144. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, "COLOR SW: ON" and "MARK SW: ON" are displayed as character strings indicating the ON state of the color switch and the engraving switch. In this case, the character string indicating the OFF state of the color switch is "COLOR SW: OFF", and the character string indicating the OFF state of the engraving switch is "MARK SW: ON".

Next, the sub CPU 102 saves (overwrites and stores) the switch information acquired in step S144 in the first switch storage area.
Next, the sub CPU 102 stores the switch information acquired in step S144 in the second switch information storage area of the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the start completion command, and returns the process to step S124 of the medal selector communication task (see FIG. 45).

[Processing when receiving a judgment completion command]
The processing at the time of receiving the determination completion command will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a determination completion command is received.
In the process at the time of receiving the determination completion command, the sub CPU 102 first registers the determination result in the queue (S151). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 has DAT0 (circular detection OK / NG), DAT1 (color determination OK / NG), and DAT2 (engraving determination OK /) of the determination completion command received from the medal selector 201 stored in the reception buffer. Register the value (data) of NG) in the queue.

Here, the DRAM of the sub RAM 103 of the present embodiment is provided with a queue as shown in FIG. The queue is an area in which data for 60 blocks of FIFO (First In, First Out) settings can be registered. The data in one block is composed of the data of the determination completion commands DAT0 to DAT2. If the data D61 in the 61st block is registered in the queue while the data for 60 blocks is registered in the queue, the data D1 registered in the queue first overflows from the queue and is discharged. Therefore, the determination results for the latest 60 medals are always registered in the queue. In the following description, the overflowing and discharging of data from the queue may be referred to as "queue overflow".

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not there is a queue overflow (S152). When it is determined that there is no queue overflow (when the determination in S152 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S157, which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a queue overflow (when the determination in S152 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs a queue registration check process (S153). In the queue registration check process, the sub CPU 102 performs circular detection, color determination, and color determination in the data of 60 blocks registered in the queue (here, the data stored in one block is regarded as one data). The number of data including "0", that is, "NG (determination NG)" is counted in any one of the determination results of the marking determination. That is, the number of data as the counting result is the number of medals that are "judgment NG", that is, "illegal medals" in any one of the judgment results of the circular detection, the color judgment, and the marking judgment.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the number of data including the NG determination counted in step S153, that is, the number of illegal medals is equal to or greater than the threshold value (“5” in this embodiment) (S154). When it is determined that the number of data including the NG determination is not equal to or greater than the threshold value (when the determination in S154 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S157, which will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of data including the NG determination is equal to or greater than the threshold value (when the determination in S154 is YES), the sub CPU 102 makes a C2 error screen display request (S155). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 instructs the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the C2 error screen.

Upon receiving the instruction, the liquid crystal display device 11 causes the display unit 11a to display a C2 error screen as shown in FIG. 52. In the present embodiment, in the C2 error screen, a character string "Please call a staff member" is displayed in the center of the screen, and a plurality of square frames are displayed in a horizontal row below the character string. An era code consisting of a two-letter alphabet is displayed in each of the plurality of square frames. In the present embodiment, from the left side to the right side of the screen, error codes of CC, CE, CO, CR, HE, HJ, DO, CA, C1 and C2 are displayed in each of the square frames. Further, a character string "ERROR CODE" is displayed below the plurality of square frames, and a character string indicating the content of each error code is displayed below the character string. For example, the character strings "CC: Inserted medal passing count error", "C1: CMOS selector error 1", and "C2: CMOS selector error 2" are displayed. Further, although omitted in the drawing, on the C2 error screen, the square frame on which the C2 error code is displayed is highlighted so as to emit light in a manner distinguishable from other square frames.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the C2-1 error in the error information history (S156). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores "C2_1" as the error content and the current date and time as the occurrence date and time in the error information history area provided in the sub RAM 103.

After step S156, when it is determined in step S152 that there is no queue overflow (when S152 is a No determination), or when it is determined in step S154 that the number of data including the NG determination is not equal to or greater than the threshold value (S154). (In the case of No determination), the sub CPU 102 performs the process of step S157. In step S157, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal can be accepted and the determination result is OK. Specifically, referring to the medal acceptance status flag setting area of the sub RAM 103, whether or not the medal acceptance status flag is set (whether the value is "1") and the determination result registered in the queue in step S151 are determined. It is determined whether the determination is OK (whether the circular detection, the color determination, and the marking determination are all "OK (determination OK)").

In step S157, when it is determined that the medal cannot be accepted or the determination result is not OK (when the determination in S157 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the determination completion command, and performs the process in the medal selector communication task (the process is performed. Return to step S124 (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, in step S157, when it is determined that the medal can be accepted and the determination result is OK (when the determination in S157 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the sub medal counter (value). The sub medal counter is provided in the sub RAM 103, and is cleared (0 is set) when the sub control circuit 101 receives a medal insertion command from the main control circuit 91.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the sub medal counter (value) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S159). The predetermined value here is the sum of the maximum number of medals that can be inserted into a unit game (3 in this embodiment) and the maximum number of medals that can be credited to pachislot 1 (50 in this embodiment). It can be set as appropriate. In the present embodiment, "55" is set as this predetermined value. In step S159, when it is determined that the sub medal counter (value) is not equal to or greater than a predetermined value (NO determination in S159), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the determination completion command, and performs the process in the medal selector communication task. Return to step S124 of (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the sub medal counter (value) is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (YES in S159), the sub CPU 102 makes a C2 error screen display request (S160). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 instructs the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the C2 error screen (see FIG. 52). The liquid crystal display device 11 that has received the instruction causes the display unit 11a to display the C2 error screen.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the C2_2 error in the error information history (S161). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores "C2_2" as the error content and the current date and time as the occurrence date and time in the error information history area provided in the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the processing at the time of receiving the determination completion command, and returns the processing to step S124 of the medal selector communication task (see FIG. 45).
The threshold value in step S154 can be changed as appropriate. For example, a threshold value setting menu may be provided in a menu that can be selected on the hall menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 described later, and the threshold value may be changed to an arbitrary value when the menu is selected. For example, the threshold value may be set in three stages of "5", "10", and "15", or the values of "1" to "99" may be arbitrarily set. The above-mentioned threshold value “5” is a threshold value set by default and is stored in the backup area of the sub RAM 103.

[Processing when receiving medal selector error command]
The processing at the time of receiving the medal selector error command will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a medal selector error command is received.
In the medal selector error command reception processing, first, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a C1 error is occurring (S171). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 confirms whether or not the C1 error screen shown in FIG. 54 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and if the C1 error screen is being displayed, determines that an error has occurred and displays the C1 error screen. If it is not, it is determined that no error has occurred.

In the C1 error screen shown in FIG. 54, as compared with the above-mentioned C2 error screen (see FIG. 52), the highlighted square frame is not the square frame in which the C2 error code is displayed, but the C1 error code. It is the same screen as the C2 error screen except that it is a square frame in which is displayed.

Here, in the present embodiment, there are two types of errors related to the medal selector, a C1 error and a C2 error. The C2 error is an error determined to have occurred by the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) (for example, the above-mentioned C2_1 and C2_2 errors and the later-described C2_3 error and C2_4 error), and when the C2 error occurs, the C2 error A screen (see FIG. 52) is displayed.

On the other hand, the C1 error is an error determined to have occurred by the medal selector 201 (control LSI 234). In the present embodiment, there are six types of C1 errors: foreign matter detection error, cover opening error, cleaning error, color template generation error, engraving template generation error, and hard error.

When it is determined in the process of step S171 that a C1 error is occurring (when the determination in S171 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the medal selector error command, and performs the process in the medal selector communication task (see FIG. 45). ) Return to step S124.

On the other hand, in the process of step S171, when it is determined that the C1 error is not occurring (when the determination in S171 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the error state of the receive buffer is 0 (S172). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the medal selector error command DAT0 or the medal selector non-operation command DAT2 (see FIG. 41) stored in the receive buffer, that is, refers to the data indicating the error state. Then, it is determined whether or not the value is "0" indicating "no error".

In step S172, when it is determined that the value of the data indicating the error state is "0" (when the determination in S172 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the medal selector error command, and performs the process for medal selector communication. Return to step S124 of the task (see FIG. 45).

On the other hand, in step S172, when it is determined that the value of the data indicating the error state is not "0" (when the determination in S172 is NO), the sub CPU 102 makes a C1 error screen display request (S173). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 instructs the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the C1 error screen (see FIG. 54).

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the "C1_ *" error in the error information history (S174). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 sets the error content (any of "1" to "6") according to the error status of the command stored in the receive buffer in the error information history area provided in the sub RAM 103. Register the current date and time as the occurrence date and time. For example, when the error state in the command stored in the receive buffer is "5" indicating "stamp template generation error", "C1_5" is registered as the error content. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the medal selector error command, and returns the process to step S124 of the medal selector communication task (see FIG. 45).

[Processing when receiving a medal selector non-operation command]
The processing at the time of receiving the medal selector non-operation command will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a medal selector non-operation command is received.
In the medal selector non-operation command reception processing, first, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of bit 0 of the medal selector non-operation command DAT0 stored in the reception buffer is "1" indicating "initialization". Judgment (S181). When it is determined that there is no initialization (when the determination in S181 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S183, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is initialization (when the determination in S181 is YES), the sub CPU 102 makes an initialization error screen display request (S182). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 instructs the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the initialization error screen. Upon receiving the instruction, the liquid crystal display device 11 causes the display unit 11a to display an initialization error screen (see FIG. 48).

After step S182, or when it is determined in step S181 that there is no initialization (when the determination in S181 is NO), the sub CPU 102 performs the activation count determination process (S183). In the activation count determination process, the matching between the number of power-on counts counted by the medal selector 201 and the power-on count counted by the sub-control circuit 101 is confirmed, and an error occurs when the difference between the two is equal to or greater than a preset threshold value. Is notified. The details of the activation count determination process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs a switch state determination process (S184). In the switch state determination process, the states of various switches of the medal selector 201 are confirmed, and if there is a change, they are registered in the error information history. The details of the switch state determination process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 performs the above-mentioned medal selector error command reception processing (see FIG. 53) (S185). As a result, even if some trouble occurs and the sub-control circuit 101 cannot receive the error command from the medal selector 201, the sub-control circuit 101 receives the medal selector non-operation command, so that the sub-control circuit 101 can receive the medal selector 201. It is possible to appropriately detect and notify the error state in which the above occurs. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the medal selector non-operation command, and returns the process to step S124 of the medal selector communication task (see FIG. 45).

[Startup count judgment process]
The activation number determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the activation count determination process.
In the start-up count determination process, the sub CPU 102 first acquires the start-up count from the receive buffer and calculates the difference between the start-up count and the value of the sub power-on counter (S191). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 acquires the number of activations by referring to the medal selector non-operation commands DAT3 and 4 (see FIG. 41) received from the medal selector 201 stored in the reception buffer, and obtains the number of activations, and the sub power-on counter. Calculate the absolute value of the difference between the values of.

Next, it is determined whether or not the absolute value of the difference calculated in step S191 is equal to or greater than a preset threshold value (S192). In this embodiment, "5" is set as the threshold value. The threshold value can be changed as appropriate. When it is determined in step S192 that the difference is not equal to or greater than the threshold value (when the determination in S192 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the activation count determination process, and performs the process when receiving the medal selector no operation command (see FIG. 55). Return to step S184.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S192 that the difference is equal to or greater than the threshold value (when the determination in S192 is YES), the sub CPU 102 makes a C2 error screen display request (S193). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 instructs the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the above-mentioned C2 error screen (see FIG. 52). The liquid crystal display device 11 that has received the instruction causes the display unit 11a to display the C2 error screen.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the C2_3 error in the error information history (S194). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores "C2_3" as the error content and the current date and time as the occurrence date and time in the error information history area provided in the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the activation count determination process, and returns the process to step S184 of the medal selector non-operation command reception process (see FIG. 55).

[Switch status judgment processing]
The switch state determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the switch state determination process.
In the switch state determination process, the sub CPU 102 first acquires the switch information from the receive buffer (S201). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the medal selector non-operation command DAT1 (see FIG. 41) received from the medal selector 201 stored in the receive buffer, and the switch information, that is, the initialization switch 206d and the color switch 206e. And the state 206f (ON / OFF state) of the marking switch is acquired.

Next, it is determined whether or not the switch information acquired in step S201 and the switch information stored in the second switch information storage area match (S202). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 has the switch information stored in the second switch information storage area of the sub RAM 103 in step S148 of the process at the time of receiving the start completion command (see FIG. 47) or step S209 described later, and in step S201. It is determined whether or not the acquired switch information matches. When it is determined that they match (when the determination in S202 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the switch state determination process, and returns the process to step S185 of the medal selector non-operation command reception process (see FIG. 55).

On the other hand, in step 202, when it is determined that the switch information acquired in step S201 and the switch information stored in the second switch information storage area do not match (when S202 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 determines. The process shifts to S203. In S203, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the marking determination is valid (S203). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of bit 2 of the setting information saved in step S141 of the start-up completion command reception processing (see FIG. 47) is 1 (engraving determination is valid).

When it is determined in step S203 that the marking determination is not valid (when the determination in S203 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S206 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S203 that the marking determination is valid (when the determination in S203 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S204. In step 204, the sub CPU 102 includes the switch information (ON / OFF state) related to the stamped switch and the switch information related to the stamped switch stored in the second switch information storage area among the switch information acquired in step S201. It is determined whether or not (ON / OFF state) and (S204) match. When it is determined that they match (when the determination in S204 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S206 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that they do not match (when S204 is determined to be NO), "CMOS MARK *" is registered in the error information history (S205). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores "CMOS MARK *" as the error content and the current date and time as the occurrence date and time in the error information history area provided in the sub RAM 103. In the error content, "CMOS MARK ON" or "CMOS MARK OFF" is registered in the switch information acquired in step S201 according to the switch information (ON / OFF state) related to the engraved switch. When the switch information related to the acquired engraved switch indicates "ON state", "CMOS MARK ON" is registered as the error content, and when the switch information related to the acquired engraved switch indicates "OFF state". Registers "CMOS MARK OFF" as the error content.

After step S205, in the case of NO determination in step S203, or in the case of YES determination in step S204, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S206. In step S206, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the color determination is valid (S206). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the value of bit 1 of the setting information saved in step S141 of the start-up completion command reception processing (see FIG. 47) is 1 (color determination is valid).

When it is determined in step S206 that the color determination is not valid (when the determination in S206 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S209 described later. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S206 that the color determination is valid (when the determination in S206 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S207. In step 207, the sub CPU 102 includes the switch information (ON / OFF state) related to the color switch and the switch information related to the color switch stored in the second switch information storage area among the switch information acquired in step S201. (S207), it is determined whether or not (ON / OFF state) and. When it is determined that they match (when the determination in S206 is YES), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S209 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S207 that they do not match (when the determination in S207 is NO), "CMOS COL *" is registered in the error information history (S208). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores "CMOS COL *" as the error content and the current date and time as the occurrence date and time in the error information history area provided in the sub RAM 103. In the error content, "CMOS COL ON" or "CMOS COL OFF" is registered in the switch information acquired in step S201 according to the switch information (ON / OFF state) related to the color switch. When the switch information related to the acquired color switch indicates "ON state", when "CMOS COL ON" is registered as the error content and the switch information related to the acquired color switch indicates "OFF state". Registers "CMOS COL OFF" as the error content.

After step S208, in the case of NO determination in step S206, or in the case of YES determination in step S207, the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S209. In step S209, the sub CPU 102 saves (overwrites) the switch information acquired in step S201, that is, the states (ON / OFF state) of the initialization switch, the color switch, and the marking switch in the second switch information storage area. Remember). Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the switch state determination process, and returns the process to step S185 of the medal selector non-operation command reception process (see FIG. 55).

[Processing when receiving medal insertion command]
The process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of receiving a medal insertion command. When the sub-CPU 102 receives the medal insertion command from the main control circuit 91, the sub CPU 102 performs the insertion command reception processing.

In the medal insertion command reception processing, first, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the credit insertion counter of the reception buffer is 0 (S211). Here, as described above, the parameter of the medal insertion command includes the credit insertion counter. The credit insertion counter is information for specifying the number of medals to be BETed from the number of credited medals. That is, the fact that the value of the credit insertion counter in the medal insertion command is "0" indicates that the insertion command was not transmitted because the credited medal was bet.

In step S211 the sub CPU 102 refers to the medal insertion command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 103, and determines whether or not the value of the credit insertion counter included in the medal insertion command is “0”. .. When it is determined that the value of the credit insertion counter is not "0" (when the determination in S211 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the credit insertion counter is "0" (when the determination in S211 is YES), the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the sub medal insertion counter (S212). The sub-medal insertion counter is provided in the sub RAM 103, and the sub-medal insertion counter is set (cleared) to 0 at the start of the game, that is, when the start command is received, or at the end of the game, that is, when the winning command is received.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a determination completion command has been received from the medal selector 201 (S213). When it is determined that the command has been received (when the determination in S213 is YES), the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reception is not received (when the determination in S213 is NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-medal insertion counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (S214). The predetermined value here can be set as appropriate. In the present embodiment, "3" is set as this predetermined value.

In step S214, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the value of the sub medal insertion counter is not equal to or higher than a predetermined value (NO determination in S214), the sub CPU 102 ends the medal insertion command reception processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the sub-medal insertion counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (when the determination in S214 is YES), the sub CPU 102 requests the C2 error screen display. Specifically, the sub CPU 102 instructs the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the above-mentioned C2 error screen (see FIG. 52). The liquid crystal display device 11 that has received the instruction causes the display unit 11a to display the C2 error screen.

Next, the sub CPU 102 registers the C2_4 error in the error information history (S216). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 stores "C2_4" as the error content and the current date and time as the occurrence date and time in the error information history area provided in the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the process at the time of receiving the medal insertion command.

[Medal selector command transmission process]
The medal selector command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the medal selector command transmission process.
In the medal selector command transmission process, the sub CPU 102 first determines whether or not ACK or NAK is received (S221). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the command most recently received from the medal selector 201 is an ACK or NAK command. When it is determined that ACK or NAK is being received (YES in S221), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S223, which will be described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S221 that ACK or NAK is not received (NO in S221), the sub CPU 102 performs ACK / NAK transmission processing (S222). In this process, the sub CPU 102 transmits an ACK or NAK command to the medal selector 201. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command transmission process.

When it is determined in step S221 that ACK or NAK has been received (YES in S221), the sub CPU 102 performs an error release determination process (S223). In the error release determination process, when the release conditions related to various errors are satisfied, the sub CPU 102 sets the release condition flag related to the error for which the release conditions are satisfied (sets the value "1"). The details of the error cancellation determination process will be described later.

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the C1 error is occurring and the release condition flag is satisfied (S224). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a C1 error has occurred based on whether or not a C1 error screen (see FIG. 54) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the release condition flag is satisfied based on whether or not "1" is set in the release condition flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 103. When it is determined that the C1 error is not occurring or the release condition flag is not satisfied (when the determination in S224 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S226 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S224 that the release condition flag is satisfied (when the determination in S224 is YES), the sub CPU 102 performs an error release command transmission process (S225). In this process, the sub CPU 102 transmits an error release command to the medal selector 201. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command transmission process. When the sub CPU 102 receives the ACK command for the error release command from the medal selector 201, the sub CPU 102 displays the liquid crystal in the ACK / NAK reception process in step S138 of the above medal selector command reception process (FIG. 46). Instructs the display device 11 to end the display of the C1 error screen.

When it is determined in step S224 that the release condition flag is not satisfied (NO determination is made in S224), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal acceptance flag cannot accept medals (S226). The medal reception flag storage area is provided in the sub RAM 103. The medal reception flag storage area is set to the ON state based on the ON / OFF state information of the medal solenoid 208 included in the non-operation command received from the main control circuit 91 in steps S229 and S232 described later. "1" (acceptable) is set, and in the OFF state, "0" (acceptable) is set. In step S226, when it is determined that the medal acceptance flag is not unacceptable (acceptable) (NO in S226), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S230 described later.

In step S226, when the medal acceptance flag determines that the medal cannot be accepted (YES in S226), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal solenoid of the non-operation command is in the ON state (S227). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the non-operation command storage area in which the latest non-operation command received from the main control circuit 91 is stored, and the ON / OFF state of the medal solenoid 208 included in the non-operation command. Based on the information in, the medal solenoid determines whether or not it is in the ON state. The non-operation command storage area is provided in the sub RAM 103 as described above.

When it is determined in step S227 that the medal solenoid is not in the ON state (when the determination in S227 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command transmission process. On the other hand, in step S227, when it is determined that the medal solenoid is in the ON state (when the determination in S227 is YES), the sub CPU 102 transmits a throw-in state (possible) command (S228). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 transmits an insertion state command in which the value of DAT0 is "1" (acceptable) to the medal selector 201.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the medal acceptance flag to the medal acceptance flag (S229). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 sets "1" (acceptable) in the medal reception flag storage area of the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command transmission process.

In step S226, when the medal acceptance flag determines that the medal acceptance is not impossible (NO determination in S226), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the medal solenoid of the non-operation command is in the OFF state (S230). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 refers to the non-operation command storage area in which the latest non-operation command received from the main control circuit 91 is stored, and the ON / OFF state of the medal solenoid 208 included in the non-operation command. Based on the information in, the medal solenoid determines whether or not it is in the OFF state.

When it is determined in step S230 that the medal solenoid is not in the OFF state (when the determination in S230 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command transmission process. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S230 that the medal solenoid is in the OFF state (when the determination in S230 is YES), the sub CPU 102 transmits a closing state (impossible) command (S231). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 transmits an insertion state command in which the value of DAT0 is "0" (cannot be accepted) to the medal selector 201.

Next, the sub CPU 102 sets the medal acceptance flag to not accept medals (S232). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 sets "0" (cannot be accepted) in the medal reception flag storage area of the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the medal selector command transmission process.

[Error cancellation judgment processing]
The error release determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the error release determination process.
In the error release determination process, the sub CPU 102 first determines whether or not the error being generated is a C1 or C2 error (S241). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 is a C1 or C2 error based on whether or not the liquid crystal display device 11 is displaying the C1 error screen (see FIG. 54) or the C2 error screen (see FIG. 52). Judge whether or not. When it is determined that the error during occurrence is not a C1 or C2 error (when S241 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S248 described later.

On the other hand, in S241, when it is determined that the error being generated is a C1 or C2 error (when the determination in S241 is YES), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the 24h door monitoring switch is in the open state (S242). Here, the 24h door open / close monitoring switch is provided at a position above the door open / close monitoring switch 67 and is connected to the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 to detect the opening / closing of the front door 2b. The sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the door is in the open state (that is, whether the front door 2b is in the open state) based on the detection result of the door open / close monitoring switch for 24 hours. When it is determined that the 24h door monitoring switch is not in the open state (when the determination in S242 is NO), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S247 described later.

On the other hand, in S242, when it is determined that the 24h door monitoring switch is in the open state (when the determination in S242 is YES), it is determined whether or not the reset switch of the non-operation command is in the ON state (S243). Here, the reset switch is a switch connected to the main control circuit 91, and when resetting various settings and error states of the pachislot 1, a game machine administrator (for example, a game hall employee) or the like It is set to the ON state by pressing. The reset switch is exposed when the front door 2b is in the open state, and can be set to the ON state by a pressing operation by the player's administrator or the like. The non-operation command that the main control circuit 91 periodically transmits to the sub control circuit 101 includes information indicating whether the reset switch is in the ON state or the OFF state. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 refers to the non-operation command stored in the non-operation command storage area of the sub RAM 103, and determines whether or not the reset switch is in the ON state. When it is determined that the reset switch is not in the ON state (NO in S243), the sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S247 described later.

On the other hand, in S243, when it is determined that the reset switch is in the ON state (YES in S243), the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the occurring error is a C1 error (S244). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the occurring error is a C1 error based on whether or not the C1 error screen (see FIG. 54) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

In S244, when it is determined that the occurring error is a C1 error (when the determination in S244 is YES), the release condition flag is set to be satisfied (S245). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 sets "1" (established) in the release condition flag storage area of the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the error release determination process, and returns the process to step S224 of the medal selector command transmission process (see FIG. 59).

In S244, when it is determined that the error being generated is not a C1 error (when S244 is a NO determination, that is, when a C2 error has occurred), the sub CPU 102 makes a C2 error screen display end request (S246). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 instructs the liquid crystal display device 11 to end the display of the C2 error screen. Upon receiving the instruction, the liquid crystal display device 11 ends the display of the C2 error screen as shown in FIG. 52. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the error release determination process, and returns the process to step S224 of the medal selector command transmission process (see FIG. 59).

When it is determined in step S242 that the 24h door monitoring switch is not in the open state (when S242 is determined to be NO), and when it is determined in step S243 that the reset switch of the no-operation command is not in the ON state (when S243 is determined to be NO). ), The sub CPU 102 shifts the process to step S247. In step S247, the sub CPU 102 sets the release condition flag to fail (S245). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 sets "0" (not established) in the release condition flag storage area of the sub RAM 103. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the error release determination process, and returns the process to step S224 of the medal selector command transmission process (see FIG. 59).

When it is determined that the error occurring in step S241 is not a C1 error or a C2 error (when the determination in S241 is NO), the sub CPU 102 determines whether the error occurring is an initialization error or a selector switch error (S248). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 initializes the occurring error based on whether or not the initialization error screen (see FIG. 48) or the selector switch error screen (see FIG. 49) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Determine if it is an error or a selector switch error. When it is determined that the error being generated is not an initialization error or a selector switch error (when S248 is NO determination), the sub CPU 102 ends the error release determination process, and processes the medal selector command transmission process (see FIG. 59). Return to step S224.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the error occurring in step S248 is an initialization error or a selector switch error (when the determination in S248 is YES), the SELECT button 28 (see FIG. 2) provided on the pedestal portion 12 is pressed. It is determined whether or not (S249). The sensor that detects the pressing of the SELECT button 28 is electrically connected to the sub-control circuit 101. Therefore, the sub CPU 102 can detect the pressing of the SELECT button 28. When it is determined in step S249 that the SELECT button 28 has not been pressed (when the determination in S249 is NO), the sub CPU 102 ends the error release determination process, and the process is the step of the medal selector command transmission process (see FIG. 59). Return to S224.

On the other hand, in S249, when it is determined that the SELECT button 28 is pressed (YES in S247), the sub CPU 102 requests the initialization error screen (see FIG. 48) or the selector switch error screen (see FIG. 49) to end the display. (S250). Specifically, the sub CPU 102 instructs the liquid crystal display device 11 to end the display of the initialization error screen (see FIG. 48) or the selector switch error screen (see FIG. 49) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. Upon receiving the instruction, the liquid crystal display device 11 ends the display of the initialization error screen or the selector switch error screen. Then, the sub CPU 102 ends the error release determination process, and returns the process to step S224 of the medal selector command transmission process (see FIG. 59).

<Error information history screen>
Next, an error information history screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 by the sub-control circuit 101 when a predetermined operation is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of an error information history screen.

In the present embodiment, for example, when the manager of the game machine (for example, an employee of the game hall) operates the setting key type switch 56, the main control circuit 91 transmits a predetermined command to the sub control circuit 101. Upon receiving this predetermined command, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display a hall menu screen (not shown). On the hall menu screen, various menus that can be selected by operating the SELECT button 28 and the enter button 29 provided on the pedestal portion 12 (see FIG. 2), a date / time setting change menu, and an error history menu are displayed.

When the error history menu is selected, the sub-control circuit 101 refers to the error information history area of the sub-RAM 103, and displays the error information history screen (see FIG. 61) based on the error information stored in the area on the liquid crystal display device. Display on 11. On the error information history screen, the error information stored in the error information history area, that is, the error content and the date and time (occurrence date and time) associated with the error content are displayed in descending order.

For example, the error information registered in S174 of the medal selector error command reception processing (see FIG. 53) is the error content "C1-1" ("foreign matter detection error"), and the date and time of occurrence is 0:10 on June 1, 2012. In the case of minutes 9 seconds, on the error history screen shown in FIG. 61, a serial number is added, and then the serial number No. "1", the error content "C1-1", and the date and time of occurrence "2012/06/01 00:10:09" are displayed. Is displayed. Therefore, the person who sees the screen can grasp that the foreign matter detection error has occurred at 0:10:09 on June 1, 2012. The displayed error content changes according to the content of the medal selector error command received in the medal selector error command reception processing (see FIG. 53), that is, the error that has occurred. For example, when a cover opening error occurs, the displayed error content is "C1-2".

In addition, the person who sees the screen can see from the display of the serial number No. "4", the error content "C2_2", and the date and time of occurrence "2012/05/30 15:23:17" at 15:23 on May 30, 2012. It can be grasped that the C2_2 error occurred in 17 seconds. When a C2_1 error, a C2_3 error, or a C2_4 error occurs and the information related to these errors is stored in the error information history area, the error history screen is displayed in the same manner as when the above-mentioned C2_2 error occurs. , "C2_1", "C2_3", and "C2_4" are displayed as error contents. Therefore, the person who sees the screen can grasp that these errors have occurred.

In addition, the person who sees the screen can see from the display of the serial number No. "16", the error content "CMOS CNT", and the date and time of occurrence "2012/05/26 08:30", on May 26, 2012 at 8:30. It can be grasped that the ACK count error occurred at the minute 00 seconds.

<First action>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 receives a determination completion command from the medal selector 201. Therefore, the result of the color determination process based on the image data output from the CMOS image sensor 232 performed by the color recognition circuit 247 is "threshold determination impossible" or does not match or resemble any of the four color templates to a predetermined degree. In the case of, that is, in the case of "determination NG" in which the color of the inserted medal does not match the color of the regular medal, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the game machine to misunderstand that a regular game medium is used for the game. It is possible to detect that there was a fraudulent act.

Further, when the result of the marking determination process (in the present embodiment, the result of the three-dimensional determination) based on the image data output from the CMOS image sensor 232 performed by the image recognition DSP circuit 242 is "determination NG", that is, input. When the engraving of the medal and the engraving of the regular medal are different, the sub-control circuit 101 can detect that there has been a fraudulent act of playing a game by mistaking the gaming machine to use a regular gaming medium.

Further, when the result of the counting process based on the image data output from the CMOS image sensor 232 is "an abnormality has occurred", the sub-control circuit 101 indicates that a foreign matter detection error has occurred from the medal selector 201. Receives a medal selector error command with a value of "1". Therefore, the sub-control circuit can make the game machine misunderstand that a legitimate game medium is used and perform a game.

Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 performs fraudulent acts performed by inserting a special device into the medal slot, or fraudulent acts performed using a medal having the same diameter as the regular medal but different in color and engraving (pattern). It can be detected with high accuracy.

<Second action>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 201 passes on the medal rail 210 until the number of inserted medals reaches the specified initial number of inserted medals after the power is turned on, and 50 in the present embodiment. A color template used for the color determination process is generated based on the image including.

Therefore, when there is a change in the medal used as a regular medal at a game store, after turning on the power, 50 consecutive regular medals after the change can be inserted to create a color template for the changed regular medal. It can be easily generated. In addition, the regular medals are deteriorated by, for example, being put into or paid out from the game machine, or washed at the game store, and a color template corresponding to the current state of the regular medals can be generated. The accuracy of can be maintained.

<Third action>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the present template used in the stamp determination process is generated by the above-mentioned template generation process. Therefore, since the present template can be generated by inserting a predetermined number of medals, the present template can be easily generated.

In addition, this template is sequentially updated by the above-mentioned present template update process. Therefore, even if the stamp becomes less noticeable than it was originally due to deterioration due to, for example, putting it in a game machine, paying it out, or cleaning it at a game store, this template can be updated according to the current state of the regular medal. .. Therefore, the accuracy of the results of various determinations can be maintained.

Further, by the three-dimensional determination process, it is possible to determine the marking on one determination target based on the results of three different types of template comparison processes. Therefore, the accuracy of the determination is improved.

Further, since the coefficients A, C, and D in the above equation (11) used in the three-dimensional determination process are updated by the above-mentioned coefficient update process, the current state of the regular medal even if the stamp is changed due to aged deterioration or the like. The coefficient can be updated according to the state of. Therefore, the accuracy of the results of various determinations can be maintained.

<Fourth action>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal counting circuit 246 of the control LSI 234 performs counting processing based on the grayscale image data output from the ISP circuit 245. The medal count circuit 246 is "IN", "OUT", "ON" based on the change in the brightness of a plurality of (16 in this embodiment) determination areas stored in the SRAM 243 in the order determination process in the count process. , It is determined whether or not the mode of transition of the data of "OFF" matches the mode of transition of the medal count determination table (see FIG. 27). Then, if they match, it is determined that "the medal has passed" or "the medal has been guided by the medal shoot 202" on the medal rail 210. Further, when any one of "IN", "OUT", and "ON" data is stored in the determination area E, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

As described above, since the passage of the medal is determined based on the change in brightness in the plurality of determination areas, the accuracy of the determination can be improved.

Further, the number of determination areas to be set on the grayscale image data can be appropriately set according to the allowable determination time required and the accuracy of the determination to be obtained. Therefore, for example, even when the number of determination areas is increased in order to further improve the accuracy of determination, it is not necessary to newly install a component such as a photo sensor for counting medals. Therefore, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, when the determination result of the counting process is "an abnormality has occurred", the sub-control circuit 101 misidentifies that the game machine is using a legitimate game medium, and there is a fraudulent act of playing the game. Is detected. That is, fraudulent activity can be detected based on the determination result of the counting process.

<Fifth action>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ISP circuit 245 of the control LSI 234 performs an image correction process of performing a lens distortion correction process and a projective conversion (homography) process on the RGB bayer image output from the ISI circuit 251.

Therefore, the RGB bayer image can be complemented so that the characteristics of the lens of the camera unit 209 and the deviation of the mounting position of the camera unit 209 do not affect the various determination / determination processes, and the accuracy of the various determination processes can be improved.

<Sixth action>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the color recognition circuit 247 of the control LSI 234 performs the threshold value determination process. As a result, it is possible to prevent a medal whose hue or saturation value is clearly different from that of the regular medal from being erroneously determined to match the color template or to be similar to a certain degree. That is, in addition to the determination based on the degree of matching with the color template, it is possible to determine whether or not the color to be determined is an effective color, so that the accuracy of the determination result of the color determination process can be improved.

<Seventh action>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the fisheye correction scaler circuit 248 of the control LSI 234 performs bilateral conversion processing on each of the created reduced image data in the equalization processing.
This makes it possible to reduce the noise of the grayscale image data and emphasize the edges in the grayscale image data. Therefore, the accuracy of the determination result in the marking determination process can be improved.

<Eighth action>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 of the control LSI 234 performs the HOG conversion process. Further, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 evaluates the degree of coincidence between the HOG data of the determination target created by the HOG conversion process and the HOG data of the present template in the stamp determination process, and calculates the evaluation value. Then, the marking determination is performed using the calculated evaluation value.

Therefore, the engraving determination process is performed by performing image matching with the HOG conversion process, which has the advantage of local shape change (geometric transformation), on the imaged data of the medal passing on the medal rail 210 while rotating. It is possible to improve the accuracy of the judgment result of.

<Ninth action>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 of the control LSI 234 performs the polar coordinate conversion process before the HOG conversion process.
As a result, the characteristics of the outer peripheral region of the regular medal can be easily reflected in the histogram set created by the HOG conversion process. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the determination result of the subsequent engraving determination process for the medal having the characteristic engraving (pattern) on the outer peripheral region.

<10th action>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 of the control LSI 234 performs the FFT conversion process. Further, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 evaluates the degree of coincidence between the FFT data of the determination target created by the FFT conversion process and the FFT data of the present template in the marking determination process, and calculates the evaluation value. Then, the marking determination is performed using the calculated evaluation value.

Therefore, not only the comparison of the entire image but also the individual comparison in a predetermined angle unit can be easily performed. For this reason, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the determination result of the engraving determination process by omitting the determination of the portion (flat surface) where the medal marking feature is difficult to appear and removing the noise component due to scratches or the like.

<11th action>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the AE correction process is performed by the ISP circuit 245 of the control LSI 234 and the host controller 241. Therefore, the exposure time of the CMOS image sensor 232 can be set to the exposure time at which the ridge portion 210a of the medal rail 210 can take an image. As a result, an appropriate exposure time can be set, so that the accuracy of the color determination process, the marking determination process, and the count process based on the image captured by the camera unit 209 provided with the CMOS image sensor 232 can be ensured.

Further, even if some dust or the like adheres to the lens of the camera unit 209 and becomes dirty, the color determination process is performed while suppressing the shortening of the life of the LED 233 by extending the exposure time instead of increasing the brightness of the LED 233. It is possible to ensure the accuracy of the stamp determination process and the count process. In addition, since the frequency of removing stains on the lens can be reduced, the workload of employees in the game hall can be reduced.

<12th action>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the AE determination process is output from the ISP circuit 245 in the AE correction process, the host controller 241 notifies the host controller 241 if the exposure time is set to the upper limit of 175 μsec. A signal instructing lighting is output to the LED 206c for notification, and the LED 206c for notification is lit. As a result, a person who sees the notification LED 206c, for example, a manager of the game hall, can grasp that some kind of obstacle (for example, dirt such as dust is attached to the lens) has occurred in the camera unit 209. ..

Further, in the AE correction process, when the determination result of the AE determination process is output from the ISP circuit 245, the host controller 241 receives the sub-control board 72 (sub-control) when the exposure time is set to the upper limit of 175 μsec. A medal selector error command having a DAT0 value of "3" indicating that a cleaning error has occurred is transmitted from the medal selector 201) to the circuit 101). Upon receiving this command, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display a C1 error screen (see FIG. 54). Then, when a predetermined operation is performed, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the liquid crystal display device to display the error information history screen (see FIG. 61). On the error information history screen, the error content "C1_3" and the date and time of occurrence are displayed as a display indicating that a cleaning error has occurred. As a result, the person viewing the display can be made aware that a cleaning error has occurred and can be encouraged to clean the camera unit 209 (removal of dirt on the lens, etc.). As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being played in a state where the accuracy of the color determination process, the engraving determination process, and the count process cannot be ensured, that is, the fraudulent activity cannot be effectively detected.

In the present embodiment, the mode in which the AE correction process is performed when the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on has been described, but the execution timing of the AE correction process can be appropriately set. For example, when the front door 2b is opened and the main control circuit 91 detects a security signal output from the door open / close monitoring switch 67, the AE correction process may be executed. Further, the AE correction process may be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the operation on the pachi-slot machine 1 is no longer detected. Further, the AE correction process may be executed every time a predetermined time, for example, one hour elapses.

<13th action>
In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) registers the determination result of the received determination completion command in the queue provided in the sub RAM 103 in the determination completion command reception processing (see FIG. 50) (step). S151). Next, when the queue overflows, the number of "judgment NG" in the judgment results registered in the queue is counted, and whether or not the value is equal to or higher than the threshold value ("5" in the present embodiment). (Steps S152 to S154).

Then, when it is equal to or more than the threshold value, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display the C2 error screen (see FIG. 52) (see step S155). Further, the sub CPU 102 stores the error content “C2_1” and the date and time of occurrence in the error information history area of the sub RAM 103 (see step S156). Then, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an error information history screen (see FIG. 61) based on the error information stored in the error information history area in accordance with a predetermined operation. As a result, the person who sees the error information history screen can grasp that the C2-1 error has occurred.

Therefore, it is determined that the number of "judgment NG" in the judgment results registered in the queue is equal to or higher than the threshold value, that is, the number of illegal medals in the latest 60 inserted medals exceeds a predetermined amount. It can be detected and notified when the queue overflows. Since the queue overflow is used, it is not necessary to add a process that specifically specifies the timing for the detection and notification, and it is efficient to detect and notify that the number of inserted fraudulent medals exceeds a predetermined amount. can do.

<14th action>
In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101) receives the medal insertion command from the main control circuit 91 in the medal insertion command reception processing (see FIG. 58), but the medal selector. When the fact that the determination completion command has not been received from 201 continues for a predetermined number of times or more during the unit game, the liquid crystal display device 11 displays the C2 error screen (see FIG. 52) (see step S215). Further, the sub CPU 102 stores the error content “C2_4” and the date and time of occurrence in the error information history area of the sub RAM 103 (see step S216). Then, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an error information history screen (see FIG. 61) that displays error information stored in the error information history area in accordance with a predetermined operation. As a result, the person who sees the error information history screen can grasp that the C2_4 error has occurred.

Here, if the medal insertion command is received from the main control circuit 91 but the determination completion command is not received from the medal selector 201, fraudulent acts outside the imaging range of the imaging means or image processing It is probable that an undecidable fraudulent activity occurred. In the present embodiment, in the above case, the C2 error screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the error information history screen based on the error information including "C2_4" and the date and time of occurrence is displayed according to a predetermined operation. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. As a result, it is possible to recognize that a fraudulent act outside the imaging range of the imaging means or a fraudulent act that cannot be determined by image processing has occurred.

<15th action>
In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 (sub-CPU 102) is in a state where medals can be accepted (see step S157) in the process of receiving the determination completion command (see FIG. 50), and the value of the sub-medal counter is a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not it is the above (see step S159). The predetermined value is set to be equal to or greater than the sum of the maximum number of medals that can be inserted into a unit game (3 in this embodiment) and the maximum number of medals that can be credited to pachislot 1 (50 in this embodiment).

Then, when it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display a C2 error screen (see FIG. 52) (see step S160). Further, the sub CPU 102 stores the error content “C2_2” and the date and time of occurrence in the error information history area of the sub RAM 103 (see step S161). Then, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an error information history screen (see FIG. 61) based on the error information stored in the error information history area in accordance with a predetermined operation. As a result, the person who sees the error information history screen can grasp that the C2_2 error has occurred.

Here, the state in which the value of the sub-medal counter becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value set as described above is an abnormal state in which more medals than the number of creditable medals are inserted into the pachislot 1. In the present embodiment, when the above state occurs, a C2 error screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and an error based on error information including "C2_4" and the date and time of occurrence is performed according to a predetermined operation. The information history screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. That is, the sub-control circuit 101 can detect the above-mentioned abnormal state and notify the occurrence of the abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of fraudulent acts that increase credits without inserting medals, which are considered to be the cause of the above-mentioned abnormal state, into the medal slot.

<16th action>
In the present embodiment, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) calculates the difference between the number of activations included in the medal selector non-operation command and the sub power-on counter in the activation number determination process (see FIG. 56) (step). See S192). Then, when the difference is equal to or greater than the threshold value, the sub CPU 102 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display a C2 error screen (see FIG. 52) (see step S193). Further, the sub CPU 102 stores the error content “C2_3” and the date and time of occurrence in the error information history area of the sub RAM 103 (see step S194). Then, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an error information history screen (see FIG. 61) based on the error information stored in the error information history area in accordance with a predetermined operation. As a result, the person who sees the error information history screen can grasp that the C2_3 error has occurred.

Here, the value of the sub power-on counter is incremented by 1 each time the power-on process (see FIG. 43) is performed, that is, each time the power is turned on (see step S102). Further, the number of activations (see FIG. 41) included in the medal selector non-operation command is incremented by 1 each time the medal selector 201 is activated. Normally, when the power is turned on to the pachislot 1, both the sub control circuit 101 and the medal selector 201 are turned on and started together, so that they are included in the value of the sub power on counter and the medal selector no operation command. The number of boots is equal. Therefore, if they are not equal, it is probable that a fraudulent act involving restarting either the sub-control circuit 101 or the medal selector 201 independently has occurred.

In the present embodiment, in the above case, the C2 error screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, and the error information history screen based on the error information including "C2_3" and the date and time of occurrence is displayed according to a predetermined operation. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. This makes it possible to recognize fraudulent activity that involves a reboot.

Further, in the present embodiment, the C2 error screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the difference is equal to or greater than a threshold value that can be appropriately set, not simply when the difference occurs. It is possible to prevent the display of an error screen or the like when the occurrence occurs spontaneously. Therefore, either the sub-control circuit 101 or the medal selector 201 was intentionally restarted independently by displaying the C2 error screen or displaying the error information history screen based on the error information including "C2_3" and the date and time of occurrence. That is to say, it is possible to surely recognize that a fraudulent act involving a reboot has been performed.

<17th action>
In the present embodiment, when the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 201 is initialized while the power is on, the value of the activation initialization flag storage area of the flash memory 244 is set to "1" indicating "initialization". .. Then, when the power is turned on, the control LSI 234 refers to the activation initialization flag storage area of the flash memory 244, and transmits a activation completion command including information indicating “initialization” to the sub-control circuit 101. Further, when the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 201 is initialized while the power is on, the value of the non-operation initialization flag storage area of the SRAM 243 is set to "1" indicating "initialization". Then, the control LSI 234 refers to the non-operation initialization flag storage area, and transmits a medal selector non-operation command including information indicating “initialization” to the sub-control circuit 101.

Further, when the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) receives the start completion command including the information indicating "initialization", the initialization error screen (FIG. 48) is displayed in the process at the time of receiving the start completion command (see FIG. 47). (See) is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 11 (display unit 11a) (see step S143).

Further, when the sub-control circuit 101 (sub-CPU 102) receives the medal selector non-operation command including the information indicating "initialization", the initialization error occurs in the medal selector non-operation command reception processing (see FIG. 47). The screen (see FIG. 48) is displayed on the liquid crystal display unit 11 (display unit 11a) (see step S182).

Therefore, when the initialization process is performed, the initialization error screen is immediately displayed in the medal selector no operation command, so that the occurrence of the initialization process can be immediately recognized. Also, at the time of startup, if the initialization process was performed during the previous energization, the initialization error screen will be displayed in the process when the startup completion command is received, so the initialization process was performed during the previous energization. I can recognize that. That is, since it is possible to reliably recognize that the initialization process has been performed, it is possible to recognize fraudulent acts involving the initialization process.

<18th action>
In the present embodiment, the sub-control circuit 101 (sub-CPU 102) switches between the color switch 206e for switching between valid and invalid of the color determination and the valid / invalid of the marking determination in the process when the activation completion command is received (see FIG. 47). The switch information including the state at the time of starting the marking switch 206f is stored in the first switch information storage area (see step S147). Further, in the same process, the sub-control circuit 101 compares the previous switch information stored in the first switch information storage area with the switch information included in the activation completion command received this time, and if they do not match, the sub-control circuit 101 compares. The selector switch error screen (see FIG. 49) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (display unit 11a) (step S146).

Further, in the switch state determination process (see FIG. 57), the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) converts the switch information included in the medal selector non-operation command and the switch information stored in the second switch information storage area. Compare (see steps S202, S204, and S207), and if they do not match, register that fact in the error information history area of the sub RAM 103 (see steps S205 and S207). Then, the sub-control circuit 101 (sub-CPU 102) causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an error information history screen (see FIG. 61) that displays information stored in the error information history area in response to a predetermined operation.

Therefore, the presence / absence of the switch operation can be recognized from the error information history screen (see FIG. 61). Further, at the time of startup, the selector switch error screen (see FIG. 49) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (display unit 11a) in the processing when the start completion command is received, so that the switch is operated during the previous energization. I can recognize that. That is, since it is possible to recognize whether or not there is an operation of the switch for switching between valid and invalid of the color determination and the marking determination, it is possible to recognize the fraudulent act accompanied by the fraudulent operation of the switch.

<19th action>
In the command transmission / reception sequence (see FIG. 42) between the medal selector 201 and the sub control circuit 101 of the present embodiment, when the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) receives the ACK command from the medal selector 201, the received ACK is received. It is determined whether or not the value of the transmission counter included in the command is equal to the value obtained by adding "1" to the value of the transmission counter included in the command received from the medal selector 201 last time. If it is determined that they are not equal, the error information history area provided in the sub RAM 103 stores "CMOS CNT" (ACK count error) as the error content and the current date and time as the occurrence date and time.

Further, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display an error information history screen (see FIG. 61) based on the error information stored in the error information history area of the sub-RAM 103 in response to a predetermined operation. As a result, the person who sees the error information history screen can grasp that the ACK count error has occurred.

Here, in the above determination of the sub-control circuit 101, if the values do not match, it is considered that a fraudulent act involving restarting either the sub-control circuit 101 or the medal selector 201 independently has occurred. Be done. In the present embodiment, a person who sees the error information history screen can grasp that an ACK count error has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to recognize a fraudulent act involving a restart.

<20th action>
When a C1 error occurs, the medal selector 201 of the present embodiment transmits a medal selector error command (see DAT0 of the medal selector error command in FIG. 41) including information indicating the content of the error that has occurred. Further, the medal selector non-operation command periodically transmitted from the medal selector 201 includes information indicating the content of the error that has occurred (see DAT2 of the medal selector non-operation command in FIG. 41). Upon receiving these commands, the sub-control circuit 101 causes the liquid crystal display device 11 to display a C1 error screen (see FIG. 54) and also displays an error information history screen (see FIG. 61) according to a predetermined operation. ..

Therefore, even if some trouble occurs in the transmission / reception of the command between the medal selector 201 and the sub-control circuit 101 and the sub-control circuit 101 cannot properly receive the medal selector error command from the medal selector 201, it is periodically transmitted. The medal selector 201 can convey to the sub-control circuit 101 that an error has occurred and the content of the error by the medal selector non-operation command. As a result, when an error occurs in the medal selector 201, the error can be reliably recognized.

<Modification example>
The gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, including its operation and effect. However, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims. In the following description of the modified example, the description of the components that are the same as or similar to the components in the above-described embodiment will be omitted, and the same reference numerals will be given in the drawings.

<Modification example 1>
For example, the medal selector 301 having a hole may be used at a position corresponding to the determination region shown in FIGS. 22 to 24.
The configuration of the medal selector 301 according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the medal selector in the first modification. In FIG. 62, the cancel shooter 206 of the medal selector 301 and the camera unit 209 (see FIG. 7) are not shown.

A medal rail 310 is formed on the base plate portion 304 of the medal selector 301 so as to be recessed in front of the pachislot machine 1 and in a substantially L shape. A plurality of ridges 310a are formed on the surface of the medal rail 310.

Further, on the medal rail 310, a determination region AB hole 310b having the same shape as the combined shape of these determination regions is formed at positions corresponding to the determination regions A1 to A4 and the determination regions B1 to B4 shown in FIGS. 22 to 24. Has been done. Similarly, a determination region C hole 310c having the same shape is formed at a position corresponding to the determination regions C1 and C2, and a determination region D310d hole having the same shape is formed at a position corresponding to the determination regions D1 to D4. .. Although not shown, the base plate portion 304 is formed with a determination region F hole 310e at a position corresponding to the determination region F shown in FIGS. 22 to 24.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, the sub-plate 305 of the medal selector 301 is formed with a determination region F hole 305a at a position corresponding to the determination region F shown in FIGS. 22 to 24. The determination region F hole 305a formed in the sub plate 305 and the determination region F hole 310e formed in the base plate portion 304 communicate with each other in the front-rear direction.
Since the other points of the medal selector 301 are the same as those of the medal selector 201, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, the holes (judgment area AB hole 310b, judgment area C hole 310c, judgment area D310d) are located at the corresponding positions of the determination areas A1 to A4, B1 to B4, C1, C2, D1 to D4, and F. Holes and determination areas F holes 310e, 305a) were provided. Therefore, the brightness value of the position corresponding to each determination area of the background grayscale image data (grayscale image data not including the image of the medal) used in the medal position detection process performed by the medal count circuit 246 is these values. The value is lower than that in the case where the hole is not provided (because the light of the LED 233 for the light source is not reflected by the CMOS image sensor 232 by passing through the hole). Therefore, even if a medal having a brightness close to the surface of the medal rail 310 is used, the difference between the brightness in each determination area of the background grayscale image data and the brightness of the medal image in the grayscale image data to be processed. (For example, when the brightness value of the surface of the medal rail 310 is 50, and the brightness value of the hole portion is 22, a value of 28 is calculated as the difference). Therefore, in the medal position detection process, medals with a brightness close to the surface of the medal rail 310 (medals whose surface is processed into black, gray, or brown colors, or medals whose surface is deteriorated or dirty and does not reflect light sufficiently. Etc.), and various medals can be detected accurately. Similarly, the accuracy of the medal edge detection process performed by the medal count circuit 246 can be improved. That is, in this modification, the medal count circuit 246 that performs the medal position detection process constitutes an object presence / absence detecting means.

A hole having the same shape may be provided at a position on the medal rail 310 corresponding to the determination region E shown in FIGS. 22 to 24. Further, since the other points of this modification are the same as those in the above embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification 2>
Next, the gaming machine of the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.
FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the medal selector in the gaming machine of the second modification. Further, FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the control LSI in the gaming machine of the second modification.
In the following description of the gaming machine according to the second modification, the description of the configuration and functions common to the pachi-slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, the control LSI 234 and the medal solenoid 208 in the medal selector 401 of the second modification are electrically connected. Therefore, the control LSI 234 can set the medal solenoid 208 to the ON state or the OFF state. Specifically, the control LSI 234 outputs a control signal for setting the medal solenoid 208 to the ON state or the OFF state from the output PORT assigned to the GPIO 250 via the GPIO 250 to the medal solenoid 208.

In the host controller 241 of the medal selector 401 in this modification, similarly to the medal selector 201 described above, when the fisheye correction scaler circuit 248 creates the reduced image data and stores it in the SRAM 243, the stored reduced image The image recognition DSP circuit 242 and the image recognition accelerator circuit 249 are instructed to execute the processing after the circular area detection processing in the marking determination processing on the data. If the circle area cannot be extracted in the circle area detection process, the subsequent processes in the stamp determination process are omitted.

By doing so, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 refers to the object before the object moving on the medal rail 210 reaches the upper exposed hole 219 or the lower exposed hole 220 (see FIG. 8) of the medal rail 210. The determination result (three-dimensional determination result) of the marking determination process can be stored in the SRAM 243.

When the acquired determination result is "determination NG", the host controller 241 that has acquired the result of the marking determination outputs a control signal for setting the medal solenoid 208 to the OFF state to the medal solenoid 208. In this case, the object to be determined can be pushed out to the after medal pressure 218 protruding from the upper exposed hole 219 or the medal stopper portion 227 protruding from the lower exposed hole 220, and discharged toward the cancel shooter 206.

Further, in the host controller 241 of the medal selector 401 in this modification, similarly to the medal selector 201 described above, the color determination associated with the same image ID is performed at the timing when the result of the marking determination processing is stored in the SRAM 243. The determination result is acquired from the SRAM 243, and a control signal for setting the medal solenoid 208 to the ON state or the OFF state is output to the medal solenoid 208 according to the determination result of the color determination process.

Therefore, in this modification, the determination result of the color determination process for the object before the object moving on the medal rail 210 reaches the upper exposed hole 219 or the lower exposed hole 220 (see FIG. 8) of the medal rail 210. The medal solenoid 208 can be set to the ON state or the OFF state according to the above.

Specifically, the host controller 241 stores "impossible threshold determination" as the determination result of the acquired threshold determination process, or "no" as the color determination result, that is, "determination". In the case of "NG", a control signal for setting the medal solenoid 208 to the OFF state is output to the medal solenoid 208. In this case, the object to be determined can be pushed out to the after medal pressure 218 protruding from the upper exposed hole 219 or the medal stopper portion 227 protruding from the lower exposed hole 220, and discharged toward the cancel shooter 206.

On the other hand, when the result of the color determination and the result of the marking determination are "determination OK", the host controller 241 keeps the state of the medal solenoid 208 in the ON state. In this case, the object to be determined is guided by the hopper device 51.

The host controller 241 of the medal selector 401 in the modified example is a control signal for setting the medal solenoid 208 to the ON state when the circular area cannot be detected in the circular area detection process performed on the reduced image data stored in the SRAM 243. Is output to the medal solenoid 208. By doing so, when the next inserted object is a regular medal, this medal can be appropriately guided to the hopper device 51. That is, the control LSI 234 constitutes a drive control means for controlling the drive of the medal solenoid 208.

In this modification, the main control circuit 91 (main control board 71) outputs a medal insertion signal to the medal selector. Specifically, when the pachislot 1 is not in the medal insertion permission state in which the medal can be inserted, the main control circuit 91 outputs a medal insertion signal having a content that the medal cannot be inserted to the medal selector 401.

Here, when the pachislot 1 is not in the medal insertion permission state where the medal can be inserted, for example, after the start lever 23 is operated by the player in the unit game, the credit counter has the maximum value (for example, 50). At that time.

When the main control circuit 91 outputs a medal insertion signal having a content that cannot be inserted, the host controller 241 of the medal selector 401 sets the medal solenoid 208 to the OFF state.

Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is in the medal insertion permission state in which medals can be inserted, the main control circuit 91 outputs a medal insertion signal of the content of the insertion permission to the medal selector 401. The host controller 241 sets the medal solenoid 208 to the ON state when the medal insertion signal of the content of the insertion permission is output from the main control circuit 91.
Since the other points of this modification are the same as those in the above embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present modification, the marking determination process and the color determination process are performed on the object passing on the medal rail 210, and the medal solenoid 208 is operated based on the result. Therefore, the object to be determined can be appropriately guided to the cancel shooter 206 or the hopper device 51 based on the result of the determination.
The main control circuit 91 may directly set the medal solenoid 208 to the ON state or the OFF state without going through the host controller 241.

<Modification example 3>
The pachislot machine of the third modification includes a medal selector 501. In the medal selector 501, when the SRAM 243 stores that "the medal has passed" as the determination result of the counting process, the host controller 241 transmits a medal counting command indicating that fact to the sub-control circuit 101. Then, when the sub control circuit 101 receives the medal count command, the sub control circuit 101 uses the sub input number counter and the sub credit count provided on the sub RAM 103 separately from the input number counter and the credit counter of the main control circuit 91. Similar to 91, the number of inserted medals and the number of credited medals are managed.

Since the circuit configuration of the medal selector 501 in the third modification is the same as the circuit configuration of the medal selector 201 (see FIG. 17), the illustration is omitted. Further, since the circuit configuration of the control LSI of the medal selector 501 is the same as the circuit configuration of the control LSI of the medal selector 201, the illustration is omitted. Regarding the medal selector 501, the installation of the initialization switch 206d, the color switch 206e, and the engraving switch 206f provided in the medal selector 201 may be omitted.

<Difference number notification function>
Further, in the pachislot machine of the modification example 3, the count number of medals managed by the main control circuit 91 and the count number of medals managed by the sub control circuit 101 are compared at a predetermined timing, and the difference number is A difference number notification function may be provided to notify when the number exceeds a predetermined number. The difference number notification function will be described in detail below.

The main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 detects the medal detection signal input from the first photo sensor 503 of the double photo sensor 502, and then within a predetermined time, receives the medal detection signal input from the second photo sensor 504. When detected, the number of inserted medals is added by 1 to the value of the inserted number counter or credit count, which is a counter provided for the main CPU 93 to count, and the value of the main count number storage area provided in the main RAM 95. Add 1 to. The main count number storage area comprises a 2-byte storage area. That is, the value of the main count number storage area can be changed in the range of 0 to 65535. When adding 1 to the value of the main count number storage area, if the value of the main count number storage area is 65535, the main CPU 93 sets the value of the main count number storage area to 0.

In this modification, when the main control circuit 91 (main CPU 93) transmits a non-operation command to the sub control circuit 101, the value of the main count number storage area at that time is included in the non-operation command as a parameter. ..

When the sub control circuit 101 receives the medal count command from the medal selector 501, the sub CPU 102 adds 1 to the value of the sub count number storage area provided in the sub RAM 103. The sub-count number storage area comprises a 2-byte storage area. That is, the value of the sub-count number storage area can be changed in the range of 0 to 65535. When adding 1 to the value of the sub-count number storage area, if the value of the sub-count number storage area is 65535, the sub CPU 102 sets the value of the sub-count number storage area to 0.

When the sub-control circuit 101 receives a non-operation command from the main control circuit 91, the sub CPU 102 refers to the sub-count number storage area, and from the value of the sub-count number storage area, the main count number included in the non-operation command. Subtract the value of the storage area. Then, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not the absolute value of the subtraction result is 5 or more. When the result of the determination is 5 or more, the sub CPU 102 causes a predetermined display (for example, "CC") to be displayed on the sub 7-segment display (not shown) to notify the error. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is not 5 or more, the sub CPU 102 does not display a predetermined display (for example, "CC") on the sub 7-segment display.
In addition, instead of "CC", the predetermined display on the sub 7-segment display is managed by the sub control circuit 101 and the count number of medals (value in the main count number storage area) managed by the main control circuit 91. Others so that it can be easily recognized that an error has occurred in which the difference from the count number of medals (value in the sub-count number storage area) is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (5 or more in this modified example). Is displayed, for example, "CE" may be displayed. Further, the predetermined number can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be set to 10 or 20 sheets.

In a pachislot machine equipped with a difference number notification function, when the difference between the number of medals managed by the main control circuit 91 and the number of medals managed by the sub control circuit 101 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the sub By displaying a predetermined display on the 7-segment display, it is possible to notify that fact. In this modified example, the value of the sub-count number storage area and the value of the main count number storage area are subtracted, and when the absolute value of the result is 5 or more, an error is notified by the sub 7-segment display. Explained. However, the mode of error notification is not limited to this. For example, instead of displaying a predetermined display on the sub 7-segment display, an error screen may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 14). Further, in addition to displaying a predetermined display on the sub 7-segment display, a warning sound may be output from all or any of the speakers 58, 64, 65L and 65R (see FIG. 14). Further, the notification using the sub 7-segment display described above, the notification using the liquid crystal display device 11, and the notification using the speakers 58, 64, 65L, 65R may be appropriately combined to perform the notification.

Here, when the difference between the count number of medals managed by the main control circuit 91 and the count number of medals managed by the sub control circuit 101 is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the double photosensor 502 is used. When the medal detection signal is not output properly due to a failure, or when a failure occurs in the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 501, the medal counting process performed by the control LSI 234 (medal counting circuit 246) is performed appropriately. There may be cases where it is not possible.

Therefore, when there is a notification related to the difference number notification function, the manager of the game machine (for example, an employee of the game hall) checks the behavior of the double photo sensor 502 and the control LSI 234, and causes a failure in these. Can be recognized and obstacles can be removed. Therefore, since various processes can be performed without any trouble, the reliability of the medal counting process in the main control circuit 91 based on the medal detection signal output from the double photo sensor 502 is improved. Further, the reliability of various processes including the medal counting process performed by the control LSI 234 is improved.

An example of including a parameter indicating the value of the number of main counts in a non-operation command has been described, but the command including this parameter is not limited to this, and for example, the winning operation command or the medal insertion command includes this parameter. You may not.

<Selector monitoring function>
Further, in the pachislot machine of this modification, it is determined whether or not the select plate 207 has moved to the guide position or the discharge position according to the instruction from the main control circuit 91, and the select plate is determined according to the instruction from the main control circuit 91. When it is determined that the 207 is not moving, a selector monitoring function for notifying an error may be provided. The various processes performed by the main control circuit 91, the sub-control circuit 101, and the medal selector 501 (control LSI 234) related to the selector monitoring function described below are performed in parallel with the various processes performed by the above-mentioned devices. ..

In a pachislot equipped with a selector monitoring function, when the main control circuit 91 transmits a non-operation command to the sub control circuit 101, whether the medal solenoid 208 is set to the ON state or the OFF state at that time. Include a parameter indicating the above in the no-operation command. Specifically, when the signal line between the main control circuit 91 and the medal solenoid 208 is set to the ON state, the main control circuit 91 sets a parameter indicating that the medal solenoid 208 is set to the ON state. On the other hand, the main control circuit 91 sets the medal solenoid 208 to the OFF state when the signal line between the main control circuit 91 and the medal solenoid 208 is set to the OFF state. Include a parameter to that effect in the non-operation command. That is, the main control circuit 91 controls the medal solenoid 208 so that the select plate 207 moves to the guide position (set to the ON state) or moves to the discharge position. The non-operation command includes the information indicating whether (it is set to the OFF state) and outputs it.

When the sub-control circuit 101 receives a non-operation command, the sub-control circuit 101 described above is based on a parameter indicating whether the medal solenoid 208 included in the received non-operation command is set to the ON state or the OFF state. The insertion status command is transmitted to the medal selector 501.

The control LSI 234 performs position determination processing when there is a change between the reception state indicated by the input status command received last time (“acceptable” or “cannot be accepted”) and the reception status indicated by the input status command received this time. .. In this modification, the control LSI 234 that performs the position determination process constitutes the position determination means.

In the position determination process, the control LSI 234 is generated by the ISP circuit 245 performing a color conversion process for converting the RGB bayer image after the lens distortion correction process and the projective conversion process into various formats, and is stored in the SRAM 243. Get the newest grayscale image data.

Next, the control LSI 234 analyzes the acquired grayscale image data and determines whether the select plate 207 is in the guide position or the discharge position. Specifically, the control LSI 234 has a width of the medal rail 210 in a direction orthogonal to the traveling direction of the medal (direction of arrow A in FIG. 65) in the grayscale image data (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “rail width”). Based on, it is determined whether it is in the guide position or the discharge position.

In FIG. 65, the select plate 207 in the guide position is shown by a solid line, and the end portion of the plate body 224 in the select plate 207 in the discharge position (a portion extending along the traveling direction of the medal) is shown by a chain line. .. As shown in FIG. 65, the rail width W1 when the select plate 207 is in the guide position is narrower than the rail width W2 when the select plate 207 is in the discharge position. The control LSI 234 compares the rail width when it is in the guide position set in advance based on an experiment or simulation with the rail width in the gray scale image data, and if they match, the select plate 207 is in the guide position. judge. On the other hand, when the rail width in the grayscale image data is wider, it is determined that the select plate 207 is in the discharge position.

As a method for determining whether the select plate 207 is in the guide position or the discharge position, a method other than the above-mentioned method can be appropriately adopted. For example, the control LSI 234 compares the shape data of the select plate 207 when it is in the guide position set in advance based on an experiment or simulation with the shape of the select plate 207 in the grayscale image data, and if they match, if they match. It may be determined that the select plate 207 is in the guide position, and if they do not match, it may be determined that the select plate 207 is in the discharge position.

Next, when the received input state command indicates "acceptable", the control LSI 234 determines that the select plate 207 is in the discharge position (not in the guide position) in the position determination process, and the medal selector indicating that fact. An error command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101. On the other hand, in the same case, when it is determined that the select plate 207 is in the guide position, the position determination process is terminated.
Further, the control LSI 234 issues a medal selector error command indicating that the select plate 207 is in the guide position in the position determination process when the received input state command indicates “not accepted” in the sub-control circuit. Send to 101. On the other hand, in the same case, when it is determined that the select plate 207 is in the guide position, the position determination process is terminated.

When the sub-control circuit 101 receives the medal selector error command, the sub-control circuit 101 notifies that the control error has occurred by using the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like.

In the pachislot machine of this modification, the select plate 207 is in the ejection position even though the main control circuit 91 sets the medal solenoid 208 to the ON state (outputs a medal insertion signal that allows insertion). An error is reported when (not in the guide position). Further, when the select plate 207 is in the guide position (not in the ejection position) even though the main control circuit 91 sets the medal solenoid 208 in the OFF state (outputs a medal insertion signal that cannot be inserted). Is notified of the error. That is, when the select plate 207 has not moved in response to the instruction from the main control circuit 91, an error can be notified.

When the select plate 207 does not move in response to the instruction from the main control circuit 91, for example, the medal solenoid 208 may be out of order. Further, for example, it is conceivable that a foreign substance exists on the medal rail 210 and prevents the select plate 207 from moving to the guide position. In this modification, the manager of the game machine (for example, an employee of the game hall) can grasp the failure of the medal solenoid 208 and the presence of foreign matter on the medal rail 210 by notifying the error. It is possible to respond early.
Since the other points of the medal selector 501 are the same as those of the medal selector 201, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification example 4>
Next, the gaming machine of the modified example 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 66.
FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a medal selector in the gaming machine of the modified example 4.
In the following description of the gaming machine according to the modified example 4, the description of the configuration and functions common to the pachi-slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 66, in the medal selector 601 of this modification, the control LSI 234 and the medal solenoid 208 are electrically connected in the same manner as the medal selector 401 according to the modification 2 described above. Therefore, the control LSI 234 can set the medal solenoid 208 to the ON state or the OFF state.
Further, the control LSI 234 in this modification performs marking determination processing and color determination processing on the object moving on the medal rail 210, and controls the operation of the medal solenoid 208 according to the result, as in the above-described modification. ..

That is, in this modification, as in the modification 2, the image recognition DSP circuit 242 of the control LSI 234 before the object moving on the medal rail 210 reaches the upper exposed hole 219 or the lower exposed hole 220 of the medal rail 210. Stores the marking determination process for this object in the SRAM 243. When the acquired determination result is "determination NG", the host controller 241 that has acquired the result of the marking determination outputs a control signal for setting the medal solenoid 208 to the OFF state to the medal solenoid 208.

Further, in the host controller 241 of the medal selector 401 in this modification, similarly to the medal selector 201 described above, the color determination associated with the same image ID is performed at the timing when the result of the marking determination processing is stored in the SRAM 243. The determination result is acquired from the SRAM 243, and a control signal for setting the medal solenoid 208 to the ON state or the OFF state is output to the medal solenoid 208 according to the determination result of the color determination process.

Therefore, the object to be judged whose marking judgment and color judgment judgment result is "judgment NG" is pushed out to the after medal pressure 218 protruding from the upper exposed hole 219 or the medal stopper portion 227 protruding from the lower exposed hole 220. , Can be ejected toward the cancel shooter 206.

Further, in the main control circuit 91 composed of the main control board 71 in this modification, when the pachislot 1 is not in the medal insertion permission state where medals can be inserted, for example, the start lever 23 is operated by the player in the unit game. After that, when the credit counter has the maximum value, a medal insertion command having the content that the medal cannot be inserted is transmitted to the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control board 72. When the pachi-slot machine 1 is in a medal insertion permission state in which medals can be inserted, a medal insertion command with the content of the insertion permission is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101.

The sub-control circuit 101 receives the medal insertion command transmitted from the main control circuit 91 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the sub-relay board 61. The sub-control circuit 101 that has received the medal insertion command transmits an insertion status command (“acceptable” or “acceptable”) corresponding to the content of the received medal insertion command to the medal selector 601.

When the medal selector 601 receives the input state command of the unacceptable content output from the sub control circuit 101, the host controller 241 of the control LSI 234 sets the medal solenoid 208 to the OFF state. That is, in this modification, the host controller 241 indicates that the determination result of the color determination or the marking determination for the most recently input object is "determination NG", and the input state command of the content that cannot be accepted from the sub-control circuit 101. Is received, the medal solenoid 208 is set to the OFF state.

In this modification, the main control circuit 91 detects a retrograde error and a medal jam error based on the medal detection signal output from the double photo sensor 502, and when these errors are detected, the game is forced. To finish.
Since the other points of the medal selector 601 are the same as those of the medal selector 401 described in the second modification, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this modification, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is not in the above-mentioned medal insertion permission state, the main control circuit 91 transmits a medal insertion command having the content of not being able to insert the medal, and the sub control circuit 101 receiving the medal insertion command has the same content ( (Not accepted) input status command is sent. Then, the medal selector 601 sets the unacceptable insertion state command and the medal solenoid 208 to the OFF state, and ejects the medal toward the cancel shooter 206. Further, even in the medal insertion permission state, the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 601 sets the medal solenoid 208 to the OFF state when the judgment result of the color judgment or the marking judgment is "judgment NG", and cancels the medal shooter. Discharge toward 206. Therefore, the inserted medals can be appropriately counted. Further, the inserted medal can be appropriately guided to the cancel shooter 206 or the hopper device 51.

<Modification 5>
Next, the gaming machine of the modified example 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68.
FIG. 67 is a rear view of the medal selector in the gaming machine of the modified example 5. In FIG. 67, the sub-plate 205 of the medal selector 701, the cancel shooter 206, and the reference marker 260 are not shown.
Further, FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the medal selector in the gaming machine of the modified example 5.
In the following description of the gaming machine according to the modified example 5, the description of the configuration and functions common to the pachi-slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 67, the medal selector 701 of this modified example includes two select plates, a select plate 707a and a select plate 707b. Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the medal selector 701 includes two medal solenoids, a first medal solenoid 708a and a second medal solenoid 708b. The first medal solenoid 708a and the second medal solenoid 708b include a solenoid main body portion (not shown) and a movable plate portion (not shown) similar to the medal solenoid 208 (see FIG. 9).

As shown in FIG. 67, the select plate 707a has a plate-shaped plate main body 724a and a pair of bearing portions (non-standard) formed by bending both ends of the plate main body 724a in the left-right direction toward the front of the pachi-slot machine 1. (Illustrated) and. Further, on the upper portion of the plate main body 724a, a flange portion 726a formed by bending the pachislot machine 1 forward and bending the rear end portion upward is formed.

The select plate 707a is rotatably supported by a shaft portion (not shown) provided on the front surface 204a of the base plate portion 204. A coil spring is provided on the shaft portion, and the flange portion 726a is urged to the front of the pachi-slot machine 1. The flange portion 726a is in contact with one end of the movable plate portion of the first medal solenoid 708a. When the first medal solenoid 708a is in the ON state, the flange portion 726a is pressed by one end of the movable plate portion of the first medal solenoid 708a and moves to the rear of the pachislot machine 1 against the urging force of the coil spring. The rotation position of the select plate 707a at this time is referred to as a "guide position". The distance between the plate body 724a of the select plate 707a at the guide position and the medal rail 210 is set to a predetermined distance that can guide the medal to the medal outlet 204c (see FIG. 8) side without discharging the medal to the cancel shooter 206 side. Has been done.

Further, when the first medal solenoid 708a is in the OFF state, the flange portion 726a is released from the pressure of the first medal solenoid 708a and moves to the front of the pachislot 1 by the urging force of the coil spring. The rotation position of the select plate 707a at this time is referred to as a "discharge position". The distance between the plate body 724a of the select plate 707a at the discharge position and the medal rail 210 is set to be longer than a predetermined distance.

When the medals moving on the medal rail 210 meet the standard dimensions, the select plate 707a at the guide position comes into contact with the upper part of the moving medals, and the medals are placed on the side of the medal outlet 204c (see FIG. ) To move to. When the medal is guided by the select plate 707a, the medal pressure 213 is pressed forward of the pachislot machine 1.

On the other hand, the select plate 707a in the ejection position allows the medal to be ejected because the distance between the plate body 724a and the medal rail 210 is large even when the medal moving on the medal rail 210 meets the standard dimensions. It is not possible to guide to the part 204c (see FIG. 8). Further, the medal is pushed out to the medal pressure 213 and discharged toward the cancel shooter 206 (see FIG. 7).

Further, when the medal moving on the medal rail 210 has a diameter smaller than the standard size, even if the select plate 707a is in the guide position, the medal is not guided by the select plate 707a and is pushed out by the medal pressure 213, and the cancel shooter 206 is used. It is discharged toward.

As shown in FIG. 67, the select plate 707b is provided on the medal rail 210 on the downstream side in the direction in which the medal moves, with respect to the select plate 707a. The select plate 707b has a plate-shaped plate main body 724b and a pair of bearing portions (not shown) formed by bending both ends of the plate main body 724b in the left-right direction toward the front of the pachi-slot machine 1. ing. Further, a flange portion 726b formed by bending the pachislot machine 1 forward and the rear end portion upward is formed on the upper portion of the plate body 724b. Further, a medal stopper portion 727b extending downward is formed on one of the bearing portions.

The select plate 707b is rotatably supported by a shaft portion (not shown) provided on the front surface 204a of the base plate portion 204. A coil spring is provided on the shaft portion, and the flange portion 726b is urged to the front of the pachi-slot machine 1. The flange portion 726b is in contact with one end of the movable plate portion of the second medal solenoid 708b. When the second medal solenoid 708b is in the ON state, the flange portion 726a is pressed by one end of the movable plate portion of the second medal solenoid 708b and moves to the rear of the pachislot machine 1 against the urging force of the coil spring. The rotation position of the select plate 707b at this time is referred to as a "guide position". The distance between the plate body 724b of the select plate 707b at the guide position and the medal rail 210 is set to a predetermined distance that can guide the medal to the medal outlet portion 204c side without discharging the medal to the cancel shooter 206 side. At this time, the medal stopper portion 727b does not protrude from the lower exposed hole 220.

Further, when the second medal solenoid 708b is in the OFF state, the flange portion 726b is released from the pressure of the second medal solenoid 708b and moves to the front of the pachislot machine 1 by the urging force of the coil spring. The rotation position of the select plate 707b at this time is referred to as a "discharge position". The distance between the plate body 724b of the select plate 707b at the discharge position and the medal rail 210 is set to be longer than a predetermined distance. At this time, it is pressed by the flange portion 726b that moves forward of the pachislot 1, and one end of the movable plate portion of the second medal solenoid 708b moves forward of the pachislot 1. Along with this, the other end of the movable plate portion of the second medal solenoid 708b moves to the rear of the pachislot 1 and presses the front end portion of the after medal pressure 218 (see FIG. 8). As a result, the after-medal pressure 218 rotates, and the rear end portion of the after-medal pressure 218 is exposed from the upper exposed hole 219. Further, the medal stopper portion 727b protrudes from the lower exposed hole 220.

The select plate 707b at the guide position contacts the upper part of the moving medal when the medal moving on the medal rail 210 meets the standard dimensions, and the medal is moved to the medal outlet portion 204c (see FIG. 8) side (right side of FIG. 67). ).

On the other hand, the select plate 707b in the ejection position allows the medal to be ejected because the distance between the plate body 724b and the medal rail 210 is large even when the medal moving on the medal rail 210 meets the standard dimensions. It is not possible to guide to the part 204c (see FIG. 8). Further, the medal is pushed out to the after medal pressure 218 protruding from the upper exposed hole 219 or the medal stopper portion 727b protruding from the lower exposed hole 220, and is discharged toward the cancel shooter 206.

As shown in FIG. 68, the medal selector 701 includes a double photo sensor 502 including a first photo sensor 503 and a second photo sensor 504. The double photosensor 502 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68.

Similar to the above embodiment, the first photo sensor 503 of the double photo sensor 502 is provided near the medal outlet portion 204c (see FIG. 8), and the second photo sensor 504 is more medal than the first photo sensor 503. It is provided downstream on the rail 210. Therefore, in the first photo sensor 503 and the second photo sensor 504, the select plate 707b is in the guide position, and the medal moving to the medal outlet portion 204c (see FIG. 8) side is detected, but the select plate 707a or the select plate 707b is in the ejection position, and the medal guided by the medal chute 202 (see FIG. 6) is not detected.
Further, a main control circuit based on other configurations and functions of the double photo sensor 502 of this modification, and a medal detection signal output from the double photo sensor 502 (first photo sensor 503 and second photo sensor 504). Since the mode of managing the values of the input number counter and the credit counter in 91 has been described above, the description here will be omitted.

Further, the first medal solenoid 708a is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68. Therefore, the main control circuit 91 composed of the main control board 71 can set the first medal solenoid 708a to the ON state or the OFF state.

The main control circuit 91 is in a medal insertion permission state in which the pachislot 1 is not capable of inserting medals, for example, after the start lever 23 is operated by the player in a unit game, or when the credit counter is at the maximum value. The first medal solenoid 708a is set to the OFF state. When the pachi-slot machine 1 is in the medal insertion permission state where medals can be inserted, the first medal solenoid 708a is set to the ON state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68, the control LSI 234 in the medal selector 701 and the second medal solenoid 708b are electrically connected. Therefore, the control LSI 234 can set the second medal solenoid 708b to the ON state or the OFF state.
Further, the control LSI 234 in this modification performs marking determination processing and color determination processing on the object moving on the medal rail 210, similarly to the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 401 in the above-described modification 2, according to the determination result. The second medal solenoid 708b is controlled.

That is, in the present modification, as in the modification 2, the determination result of the color determination and the marking determination before the object moving on the medal rail 210 reaches the upper exposed hole 219 or the lower exposed hole 220 of the medal rail 210. The ON / OFF state of the second medal solenoid 708b can be controlled based on the above.

Therefore, when the determination result of the marking determination or the color determination is "determination NG", a control signal for setting the second medal solenoid 708b to the OFF state is output to the second medal solenoid 708b. In this case, the object to be determined can be pushed out to the after medal pressure 218 protruding from the upper exposed hole 219 or the medal stopper portion 727b protruding from the lower exposed hole 220, and discharged toward the cancel shooter 206.

Further, the host controller 241 of the medal selector 701 in the modified example turns on the second medal solenoid 708b when the circular area cannot be detected in the circular area detection process performed on the reduced image data stored in the SRAM 243. The control signal to be set is output to the second medal solenoid 708b.

As shown in FIG. 68, the control LSI 234 of the camera unit 209 in the medal selector 701 is connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. Therefore, various commands are transmitted and received between the sub-control circuit 101 and the medal selector 701, as in the above-described embodiment and modification.
Further, the sub-control circuit 101 can set the second medal solenoid 708b to the ON state or the OFF state via the host controller 241 in the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 701. Specifically, when the sub-control circuit 101 detects the above-mentioned medal count command output from the host controller 241 of the medal selector 701, the sub-control circuit 101 adds 1 to the value of the inserted number counter provided in the sub RAM 103. When the value of the input number counter of the sub RAM 103 is the maximum value (for example, 3), the value of the credit counter, which is a counter provided in the sub RAM 103 for the sub CPU 102 to count the number of credited medals. Add 1 to. The sub-control circuit 101 is the second after the start lever 23 is operated by the player in the unit game (when the start command is received), and when the credit counter of the sub-RAM 103 is the maximum value (for example, 50). The medal solenoid 708b is set to the OFF state via the host controller 241 of the medal selector 701. When the pachislot is in the medal insertion permission state where medals can be inserted, the second medal solenoid 708b is set to the ON state via the host controller 241.

Further, the main control circuit 91 detects a retrograde error and a medal jam error based on the medal detection signal output from the double photo sensor 502, and when these errors are detected, the game is forcibly terminated. .. Further, the main control circuit 91 transmits an error command according to the content of the detected error to the sub control circuit 101.
When the sub control circuit 101 receives an error command related to a retrograde error or a medal jam error from the main control circuit 91, the sub control circuit 101 turns off the second medal solenoid 708b via the host controller 241 in the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 701. Set to state.

In this modification, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is not in the above-mentioned medal insertion permission state, the main control circuit 91 sets the first medal solenoid 708a to the OFF state and ejects medals toward the cancel shooter 206. Further, even if the first medal solenoid 708a is in the ON state, the control LSI 234 of the medal selector 701 sets the second medal solenoid 708b in the OFF state when the judgment result of the color judgment or the marking judgment is “Judgment NG”. , Discharge the medal toward the cancel shooter 206. Therefore, the inserted medals can be appropriately counted. Further, the inserted medal can be appropriately guided to the cancel shooter 206 or the hopper device 51.

<Modification 6>
Next, the gaming machine of the modified example 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 69.
FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the medal selector in the gaming machine of the modified example 6.
In the following description of the gaming machine according to the modified example 6, the description of the configuration and functions common to the pachi-slot machine 1 in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

The medal selector 801 in this modification includes two select plates, a select plate 707a and a select plate 707b, similarly to the medal selector 701 of the modification 5 (see FIG. 67).

Further, as shown in FIG. 69, the second medal solenoid 708b in the medal selector 801 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected via the sub-relay board 61. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 composed of the sub-control board 72 can set the second medal solenoid 708b to the ON state or the OFF state. On the other hand, the control LSI 234 and the second medal solenoid 708b are not electrically connected. This point is different from the modified example 5. In the following, this difference will be described, and the points common to the modified example 5 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, the control LSI 234 of the camera unit 209 in the medal selector 801 is connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61, as in the modified example 5. Therefore, the above-mentioned various commands can be transmitted and received between the sub-control circuit 101 and the medal selector 801.

In this modification, before the object moving on the medal rail 210 reaches the upper exposed hole 219 or the lower exposed hole 220 of the medal rail 210, the determination completion command based on the determination result of the color determination and the marking determination is sub-controlled. It is transmitted to the circuit 101.

Then, when the determination result of the color determination or the marking determination in the received determination completion command is "determination NG", the sub-control circuit 101 sets the control signal for setting the second medal solenoid 708b to the OFF state, and sets the second medal solenoid 708b to the second medal solenoid 708b. Output to. In this case, the object to be determined can be pushed out to the after medal pressure 218 protruding from the upper exposed hole 219 or the medal stopper portion 727b protruding from the lower exposed hole 220, and discharged toward the cancel shooter 206.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the color determination and the marking determination in the received determination completion command is "determination OK", the sub-control circuit 101 keeps the state of the second medal solenoid 708b in the ON state. In this case, the object to be determined is guided to the medal outlet portion 204c side, that is, is guided to the hopper device 51.

Further, the host controller 241 of the medal selector 801 in the modified example outputs a command indicating that when the circular area cannot be detected in the circular area detection process performed on the reduced image data stored in the SRAM 243. Upon receiving this command, the sub control circuit 101 (sub CPU 102) outputs a control signal for setting the second medal solenoid 708b to the second medal solenoid 708b to the second medal solenoid 708b.

In this modification, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is not in the above-mentioned medal insertion permission state, the main control circuit 91 sets the first medal solenoid 708a to the OFF state and ejects medals toward the cancel shooter 206. Further, even when the first medal solenoid 708a is in the ON state, when the sub-control circuit 101 receives a determination completion command from the medal selector 701 that the determination result of the color determination or the marking determination is “determination NG”, the second medal selector 701 is second. The medal solenoid 708b is set to the OFF state, and the medal is ejected toward the cancel shooter 206. Therefore, the inserted medals can be appropriately counted. Further, the inserted medal can be appropriately guided to the cancel shooter 206 or the hopper device 51.

<Other variants>
Further, in the above embodiment, the mode of generating up to four color templates and the present template has been described, but the number of these templates can be appropriately set according to the allowable determination required time and the desired determination accuracy.

Further, in the above embodiment, the color template and the present template stored in the SRAM 243 are deleted when the initialization switch is pressed when the power of the game machine is turned on. However, instead of this, an arbitrary operation may be set to erase various templates stored in the SRAM 243. For example, various templates of SRAM 243 may be deleted in conjunction with the change of the setting of the game machine.

Further, in the order determination process when medals cannot be inserted, the mode of data transition in each determination area of the four grayscale image data stored in the SRAM 243 and E1 to E1 defined in the medal count determination table. If the mode of data transition corresponding to E4 does not match, it may be determined that "an abnormality has occurred" and the determination result may be stored in SRAM 243.

Further, in the above embodiment, the mode in which the host controller 241 instructs the image recognition DSP circuit 242 to execute the preprocessing when the reduced image is stored in the SRAM 243 has been described. However, instead of this, when the medal counting circuit 246 determines that the medal has passed on the medal rail 210, the host controller 241 is time before the determination (that is, before the predetermined frame). The image recognition DSP circuit may be instructed to perform preprocessing using the reduced image data. The predetermined time is set in advance based on an experiment or a simulation so that the image of the medal is always included in the reduced image before the predetermined time. In this case, after passing the medal, it is determined after the fact whether or not the passed medal is a regular medal.

Further, the threshold value determination process in the color determination process may be omitted. Further, the color recognition circuit 247 may perform the following color determination processing based on the data related to the hue and saturation output from the ISP circuit 245. In this color determination process, the color recognition circuit 247 first expresses the integrated value of the data related to the hue and saturation near the center of the image data as a vector (vector conversion), and calculates the angle of the vector in the three-dimensional space. calculate. Next, the color recognition circuit 247 compares the calculated vector angle with a predetermined color threshold value and determines whether or not the color matches the color of the regular medal. The predetermined threshold is a predetermined threshold (for example, on the three-dimensional space related to the regular medal to be compared) based on the angle of the vector calculated by the same method as the above-described processing for the image data related to the regular medal. Within ± 10 degrees of the angle on the individual coordinates (XYZ) of the vector).

Further, in the above embodiment, the timing at which the color template is generated (when 50 medals are inserted after the power is turned on) and the timing at which the present template is generated (the value of the learning medal counter is 127 or 259) are different. .. Therefore, the color determination process may not be performed until this template is generated. Alternatively, even if the color judgment process is performed during the generation of this template and the data related to the medal whose judgment result of the color judgment process is "threshold judgment impossible" or "no" is not used for the generation of this template. Good.

Further, the present invention may be adopted for other gaming machines that use a gaming medium, such as pachinko.
Further, the embodiment in which the double photo sensor 502 is used as an example of the proximity sensor for detecting an object moving on the medal rail 210 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the approach of the object and the presence / absence of a detection target in the vicinity are detected in a non-contact manner. Other proximity sensors that can be used (inductive, capacitive, ultrasonic, photoelectric, magnetic proximity switches) may be used.

[Application Example 1 of an Embodiment of the present invention]
Next, the gaming device 1500 according to the application example 1 of the embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The game device 1500 is a medal counter installed in a hall, and is provided, for example, at the end of an island where a plurality of pachislot machines 1 are arranged. Further, the gaming device 1500 includes any of the above-mentioned medal selectors 201, 301, 401, 501, 601, 701, 801. In the following description, the gaming device 1500 including the medal selector 201 will be described.

FIG. 70 is a plan view of the gaming device 1500 according to Application Example 1 of the embodiment of the present invention as viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 70, the game device 1500 includes a hopper 1543 (game medium storage means) having a mortar-shaped recess for storing the inserted medals (game medium). At the lower part of the hopper 1543, a rotating disk 1526 with a receiving hole is provided, in which each inserted medal is dropped into the medal receiving hole 1524 and the medal receiving hole 1524 is eccentrically rotated. The rotating disk 1526 with a receiving hole starts its rotation by pressing the counting start switch 1541. Medal of the rotating disk 1526 with a receiving hole The medal that has entered the receiving hole 1524 is discharged from the lower part of the 1 hopper 543 as the rotating disk 1526 with a receiving hole rotates, and flows into the medal selector 201 provided below the hopper 1543. To do. Then, based on the detection result of the double photo sensor 502 of the medal selector 201, the medal detection unit (not shown) and the counter control means (not shown) of the counter 1549 (game medium counting means) detect, count, and store the medal. To. The counter control means is composed of a processing device and various memories, and controls various processes (including counting processes of the game medium) performed by the counter.

On the upper surface of the gaming device 1500, the inserted number display unit 1540a for displaying the counted number of inserted medals and the number of inserted medals to be printed on the receipt (a form of recording medium) are pressed. The receipt print number setting switch 1534r, the receipt print number display unit 1540b for displaying the set receipt print number, and the number of medals to be recorded on the medal storage card (a form of recording medium) among the inserted medals are set. It is provided with a card recording number setting switch 1534c to be pressed at the time of printing, and a card recording number display unit 1540c for displaying the set card recording number.

Further, on the upper surface of the gaming device 1500, a number switch (a form of input means 1534) from 0 to 9 for setting the number of inserted medals to be printed on the receipt and the number of stored medals to be recorded on the stored medal card. ) And a BS switch that is pressed when correcting the number of input sheets and erases the value input immediately before. Further, on the upper surface of the gaming device 1500, an entry switch 1534e for instructing execution of a process of printing on a receipt and a process of recording on a storage medal card after setting the number of each medal is arranged.

In addition, the gaming device 1500 is a card reader / writer 1537 that reads and writes the number of stored medals to a stored medal card having a magnetic recording type or a built-in IC tag, and reads unique identification information (card ID) that identifies a player. (A form of recording medium control means) and a receipt printing means 1539 (a form of recording medium control means) that prints and outputs the number of medals, a bar code, or a QR code (registered trademark) on a receipt sheet. , A medal tray 1517 for storing medals detected as non-regular medals.

According to the gaming device 1500 provided with such a medal selector, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described embodiment or the above-described modification can be obtained. That is, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts that mislead the user into thinking that a legitimate game medium is being used.

For example, as described above, the medal selector 201 is adopted, and the gaming device 1500 is provided with a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying the above-mentioned various screens (see FIGS. 48, 49, 52, 54, 61). Alternatively, by connecting the game device 1500 to the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts such as an act of misidentifying that a legitimate game medium is being used. In this case, the counter control means may perform various operations performed by the sub-control circuit 101 in order to display various screens, or a control means similar to that of the sub-control circuit 101 may be separately provided and performed by the control means. You may.
Further, when the control LSI 234 employs a medal selector (for example, the medal selectors 401, 601, 701 of the modified examples 2, 4 and 5) capable of setting the medal solenoid to the ON state or the OFF state, the double photosensor is used. Since only the regular medals can be detected in the 502, only the regular medals are detected, counted, and stored by the medal detection unit and the counter control means of the counter 1549 (game medium counting means). Instead of the detection result of the double photo sensor 502, the counter control means may count only regular medals based on the determination completion command (see FIG. 41) from the medal selector.

[Application Example 2 of an Embodiment of the present invention]
Next, the gaming device 1600 according to the application example of the embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The game device 1600 is a medal counter that is attached to each pachislot machine 1 in the hall, is installed corresponding to the adjacent pachislot machines 1, and is communicably connected to the corresponding pachislot machines 1. Further, the gaming device 1600 includes any of the above-mentioned medal selectors 201, 301, 401, 501, 601, 701, 801. In the following description, the gaming device 1600 including the medal selector 201 will be described.

FIG. 71 is a perspective view showing the internal configuration of the gaming device 1600 according to Application Example 2 of the embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 71, the front portion 1621 of the gaming device 1600 is provided with an LED (light emitting diode) portion 1631, a card insertion slot 1632, a bill insertion slot 1633 capable of inserting bills, and a touch panel LCD (liquid crystal display). The configured operation unit 1634, camera 1635, non-contact IC card reader / writer 1636, medal (game medium) payout tray 1637, speaker cover 1638, medal (game medium) counting slot 1639, and the like are provided. The card insertion slot 1632 is, for example, an insertion slot capable of accepting an information card issued by a card issuing machine (not shown) in the hall. The LED unit 1631 is composed of a full-color LED 1631A and an infrared LED (infrared light emitting diode) 1631B.

By inserting an information card or a bill of a predetermined amount into the card insertion slot 1632 or the bill insertion slot 1633, the player can rent a medal as a game medium necessary for the game. In addition, the player can rent medals necessary for the game by holding the non-contact IC card over the non-contact IC card reader / writer 1636.

When the gaming device 1600 receives the insertion of value media such as information cards, banknotes, and IC cards, it receives a number of medals according to the amount of the inserted value media in a payout hopper (first count) provided inside. Part) Count by 1651 and pay out from the medal payout tray 1637. The player can play a game in the pachi-slot machine 1 by inserting the medals paid out from the medal payout tray 1637 into the medal insertion slot 21 (see FIG. 2) of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1, medals are paid out to the medal tray unit 34 according to the result of the game. The player can scoop up the medal from the medal tray unit 34 and insert the medal into the medal counting slot 1639 of the gaming device 1600, so that the medal can be counted by the gaming device 1600. The game device 1600 counts medals inserted from the medal counting slot 1639 by a counting hopper (second counting unit) provided inside.

The counted result is recorded on the card inserted from the card insertion slot 1632, or stored in a storage unit provided in the hall computer.

The medals counted in the counting hopper are discharged to the conveyor from the discharge port provided on the bottom surface of the game device 1600 and collected. In a place where a conveyor is not provided, a storage box for storing medals may be installed in the lower part of the gaming device 1600, and medals may be discharged to this storage box.

The gaming device 1600 includes an identification means (information card reader, bill identification device 1661, IC card reader / writer, etc.) for identifying value media such as an information card, a bill, and a non-contact IC card, and a power supply inside the housing 1622. It has a first storage space AR11 for storing the unit 1665. Further, below the first storage space AR11, there is a second storage space AR13 in which the payout hopper 1651 and the counting hopper 1671 are vertically arranged and stored. In the first storage space AR11, identification means (information card reader, bill identification device 1661, IC card reader / writer, etc.) are stored in the upper part, and a power supply unit 1665 is stored in the lower part. That is, the lower part of the first storage space AR11 forms the power supply unit storage space AR12 for storing the power supply unit 1665.

The payout hopper 1651 housed in the second storage space AR13 below the first storage space AR11 is from the hall via the replenishment opening 1652 provided in the back portion of the housing 1622 at the upper part thereof. The medals are replenished by the supply route. A replenishment passage 1653 is provided between the replenishment opening 1652 and the payout hopper 1651, and medals replenished from the replenishment opening 1652 fall into the payout hopper 1651 via the replenishment passage 1653. To do.

On the other hand, an introduction passage 1672 is provided between the medal counting slot 1639 provided on the front surface portion 1621 of the housing 1622 and the counting hopper 1671, and medals inserted from the medal counting slot 1639. Drops into the counting hopper 1671 through the introduction passage 1672 (arrow a). The counting hopper 1671 is provided with a medal selector 201 and a counting means for counting medals. The medals inserted from the medal counting slot 1639 flow into the medal selector 201, are counted by the counting means, and are discharged to the conveyor from the discharge port 1673 provided on the bottom surface of the housing 1622 (arrow b). Will be recovered.

A front panel 1623 is provided on the front surface portion 1621 of the gaming device 1600, and a speaker cover 1638 is provided on the front panel 1623. The speaker cover 1638 has a plurality of transmission ports for transmitting sound from a speaker provided on the back surface side of the front panel 1623 (speaker cover 1638) to the front.

FIG. 72 is a cross-sectional view of a counting hopper 1671 according to Application Example 2 of the embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 72, an opening 1675 for receiving a medal is provided in the front portion of the medal passage 1676 of the counting hopper 1671, and the opening 1675 is provided with a medal for inserting a medal from the outside. A counting slot 1639 (see FIG. 71) is attached. As a result, the medals inserted into the medal counting slot 1639 are guided to the counting hopper 1671 through the opening 1675 and the medal passage 1676. The medals led to the counting hopper 1671 flow into the medal selector 201. Then, counting is performed by the counting means based on the detection result of the double photo sensor 502 of the medal selector 201, and the counting is performed from the discharge port 1674 provided on the bottom surface of the counting hopper 1671 via the discharge port 1673 (see FIG. 71) of the housing 1622. Is discharged to the transport conveyor. The ejection port 1674 of the counting hopper 1674 is provided with guide portions 1674A and 1674B for guiding the ejected medals, and the guide portions 1674A and 1674B can make the ejection direction of the medals oblique. As a result, the discharge direction of the medals discharged from the discharge port of the counting hopper 1671 (that is, the medals discharged from the discharge port 1673 (FIG. 71) of the housing 1622) is arranged in the lower vicinity of the gaming device 1600. It can be in the direction of the transport conveyor.

Incidentally, the size of the opening 1675 of the counting hopper 1671 and the medal counting slot 1639 (see FIG. 71) is set to be a size that is difficult for the player to reach. A plate-shaped medal guide member 1629 (see FIG. 71) is fixed to the medal counting slot 1639 alongside the front panel 1623 (see FIG. 71). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's hand from entering through the medal counting slot 1639.

Further, a photo sensor (not shown) is provided in the opening 1675 so as to detect when a player's hand enters. As a result, when the player's hand is erroneously inserted, or when the hand is inserted due to improperness, the operation of the counting hopper 1671 can be stopped by detecting with the photo sensor. The photo sensor is attached at a position where medals inserted through the medal counting insertion port 1639 (see FIG. 71) and the opening 1675 are not erroneously detected. For example, by providing so as to detect only the state of the upper part of the opening 1675, it is possible to detect only the player's hand that enters the upper part of the opening 1675 without detecting the medal that slides under the opening 1675. it can. Incidentally, the counting hopper 1671 is also provided with a sensor (not shown) for detecting the insertion of a medal.

According to the gaming device 1600 provided with such a medal selector, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described embodiment or modification can be obtained. That is, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts that mislead the user into thinking that a legitimate game medium is being used.

For example, as described above, the medal selector 201 is adopted, and the gaming device 1600 is provided with a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying the above-mentioned various screens (see FIGS. 48, 49, 52, 54, 61). Alternatively, by connecting the game device 1600 to the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts such as an act of misidentifying that a legitimate game medium is being used. In this case, various operations performed by the sub-control circuit 101 to display various screens may be performed by the counting means, or may be separately performed by providing the same control means as the sub-control circuit 101.
Further, when the control LSI 234 employs a medal selector (for example, the medal selectors 401, 601, 701 of the modified examples 2, 4 and 5) capable of setting the medal solenoid to the ON state or the OFF state, the double photosensor is used. Since only the regular medals can be detected in the 502, only the regular medals are counted by the counting means of the gaming device 1600. Instead of the detection result of the double photo sensor 502, the counting means may count only regular medals based on the determination completion command (see FIG. 41) from the medal selector.

[Application Example 3 of an Embodiment of the present invention]
Next, the gaming device 1700 according to Application Example 3 of the embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The gaming device 1700 includes any of the above-mentioned medal selectors 201, 301, 401, 501, 601, 701, 801. In the following description, the gaming device 1700 including the medal selector 201 of the second modification will be described. Further, the game device 1700 may be a stand-alone device that only selects game media, or is connected to a device for counting the number of game media (so-called jet counter, each machine counter). It may be built-in, or it may be built in a game machine. In the medal selector 201 of the present application example 3, the control LSI 234 can set the medal solenoid to the ON state or the OFF state in the same manner as the medal selector 401.

FIG. 73 is a perspective view showing an example of the internal structure of the gaming device 1700 according to Application Example 3 of the embodiment of the present invention.
As shown in FIG. 73, the gaming device 1700 is provided inside the housing M2, the housing portion M21 provided above the housing M2 and accommodating medals to be sorted, and the housing M2. A hopper device M20 as a sending unit that sends out the inserted medals one by one, a medal selector 201 that selects medals, and a first guide unit that receives the medals sent out from the hopper device M20 and guides them to the medal selector. It has a guide member M40. As described above, in the present application example 3, two medal selectors 201 are provided. That is, the hopper device M20 is configured to supply medals to the two medal selectors 201 via the two guide members M40 and M40, respectively. Further, the gaming device 700 has a power supply unit M10 behind the lower side inside the housing M2. Although not shown, the power supply unit M10 is electrically connected so as to supply power to the hopper device M20 and the medal selector 201.

Further, below the two medal selectors 201, a first discharge passage M50 that guides the medals detected as regular medals to the discharge port by the two medal selectors 201 is arranged. Further, below the two medal selectors 201, second discharge passages M8 and M8, which are passages for passing medals determined to be non-regular by the two medal selectors 201 and guiding them to the lower plate, are arranged respectively. ing. Further, on the bottom surface of the housing M2, second discharge ports M11 and M11 are formed at positions corresponding to the second discharge passages M8 and M8.

According to the gaming device 1700 provided with such a medal selector, the same operation and effect as those of the above-described embodiment or the above-described modification can be obtained. That is, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts that mislead the user into thinking that a legitimate game medium is being used.

Although the modified examples and the application examples 1 to 3 of the present embodiment have been described above, each configuration of the present embodiment, each configuration of the modified example, and each configuration of the application examples 1 to 3 are arbitrarily combined as long as there is no contradiction. be able to.

Although the embodiment, various modified examples and application examples of the gaming machine according to the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configurations of the above-described embodiment and various modified examples may be appropriately combined.

<Summary>
[Difference number notification function]
Based on the detection result of the proximity sensor provided in the game medium detecting means, the first control unit that counts the game medium and the passing determination means provided in the game medium detecting means take an image of an object passing through the passage. It is desired to improve the reliability of the counting process performed by the first control unit in the game machine including the second control unit that performs the counting process for counting the game medium when it is determined that the object has passed through the passage. There is. Further, it is desired to improve the reliability of various processes performed by the second control unit.

The present invention has been made to solve the first problem, and a first object of the present invention is to improve the reliability of counting processing performed by the first control unit and the second control unit. is there.

In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

A slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal slot 21) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 501) that detects a game medium inserted from the slot, and
A first control unit (for example, a main control circuit 91) that executes control related to a game, and
A second control unit (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that executes control related to the production of the game, and
A game machine including a storage means (for example, a hopper device 51) for storing a game medium.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210) that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, a proximity sensor (for example, a double photo sensor 502) that detects an object moving in the passage, and the like.
An imaging means (for example, a camera unit 209) that images the passage, and
Passage determination means (for example, control LSI 234) for determining whether or not an object has passed through the passage based on image data obtained via the image pickup means, and
When the passage determination means determines that the object has passed through the passage, the passage determination notification means (for example, the control LSI 234) that notifies the second control unit to that effect.
Based on the image data, a game medium determination means (for example, a color recognition circuit 247 and an image recognition DSP circuit 242 of the control LSI 234) for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular game medium, and
Guide means (for example, select plate 207) provided so as to be movable between a guide position for guiding an object passing through the passage to the storage means and a discharge position for discharging the object to the outside of the game machine.
It has a driving means (for example, a medal solenoid 208) for driving the guide means, and has.
The first control unit
Based on the detection result of the proximity sensor, the objects moving in the passage are counted, and the objects are counted.
When the game medium is allowed to be inserted, the driving means is controlled to move the guide means to the guide position.
When it is not in a state of permitting the input of the game medium, the driving means is controlled to move the guide means to the discharging position.
The second control unit counts the objects that have passed through the passage based on the notification from the passage determination notification means.
A gaming machine characterized in that an error is notified when the difference between the value counted by the first control unit and the value counted by the second control unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

The proximity sensor has a first sensor (for example, a first photo sensor 503) and a second sensor (for example, a second photo sensor 504) that output a detection result when an object passing through the passage is detected.
The first control unit may count the objects moving in the passage when the output of the detection result of the first sensor and the output of the detection result of the second sensor are in a predetermined order. Good.

A first count storage means (for example, main RAM 95) that stores the values counted by the first control unit, and
A second count storage means (for example, a sub RAM 103) for storing the value counted by the second control unit is provided.
The first count storage means and the second count storage means may each be composed of a storage area of 2 bytes.

In the first gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, when the difference between the value counted by the first control unit and the value counted by the second control unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, an error is notified.
Here, when the difference between the value counted by the first control unit and the value counted by the second control unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, it is conceivable that a failure has occurred in the proximity sensor or the passage determination means. ..

Therefore, when an error is notified, the manager of the game machine (for example, an employee of the game hall) can recognize the failure caused by checking the behavior of the proximity sensor and the passage determination means. Can and remove obstacles. Therefore, since various processes can be performed without any trouble, the reliability of the count process performed by the first control unit can be improved. In addition, the reliability of various processes performed by the second control unit can be improved.

[Selector monitoring function]
It is desired to quickly identify and deal with deficiencies such as a failure of the driving means for driving the guide means for guiding the game medium and the presence of foreign matter in the passage through which the game medium passes.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned second problem, and a second object of the present invention is a failure of a drive means for driving a guide means for guiding a game medium, or a failure of the drive means through which the game medium passes. The purpose of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of notifying the presence of a foreign substance on a passage.

In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

A slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal slot 21) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 501) that detects a game medium inserted from the slot, and
A first control unit (for example, a main control circuit 91) that executes control related to a game, and
A second control unit (for example, sub-control circuit 101) that executes control related to the production of the game, and
A game machine including a storage means (for example, a hopper device 51) for storing a game medium.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210) that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, a proximity sensor (for example, a double photo sensor 502) that detects an object moving in the passage, and the like.
An imaging means (for example, a camera unit 209) that images the passage, and
Based on the image data obtained via the image pickup means, the game medium determination means for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular game medium (for example, the color recognition circuit 247 of the control LSI 234 and the image recognition). DSP circuit 242) and
Guide means (for example, select plate 207) provided so as to be movable between a guide position for guiding an object passing through the passage to the storage means and a discharge position for discharging the object to the outside of the game machine.
It has a driving means (for example, a medal solenoid 208) for driving the guide means, and has.
The first control unit
The game medium is counted based on the detection result of the proximity sensor, and the game medium is counted.
When the game medium is allowed to be inserted, the driving means is controlled to move the guide means to the guide position.
When it is not in a state of permitting the input of the game medium, the driving means is controlled to move the guide means to the discharging position.
Control content information indicating whether the drive means is controlled to move to the guide position or the guide means is controlled to move to the discharge position is output.
The game medium detecting means is
The guide means is in the guide position when the control content information indicates that the guide means is controlled to move to the guide position based on the image data obtained via the image pickup means. It is determined whether or not the guide means is in the discharge position when the control content information indicates that the guide means is controlled to move to the discharge position. Position determination means and
When the position determining means determines that the guide means is not at the guide position, or when the position determining means determines that the guide means is not at the ejection position, the second control unit is notified of an error. It also has an error notification means,
The second control unit is a gaming machine characterized in that it notifies an error notified from the error notification means.

Further, in the image data obtained via the imaging means, the width of the passage becomes narrower when the guide means is in the guide position than when the guide means is in the discharge position.
The position determining means determines whether or not the guide means is in the guide position, or whether or not the guide means is in the guide position, based on the width of the passage (for example, rail widths W1 and W2) in the image data obtained via the imaging means. It may be determined whether or not the guide means is in the discharge position.

Further, the position determining means determines whether or not the guide means is at the guide position, or whether or not the guide means is at the guide position, based on the image data obtained by converting the color image data obtained through the imaging means into grayscale data. May be determined whether or not is in the discharge position.

In the second gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, when the guide means is not in the guide position even though the first control unit controls the drive means so that the guide means moves to the guide position. An error is reported. Further, although the first control unit controls the drive means so that the guide means moves to the discharge position, an error is notified when the guide means is not in the discharge position. That is, when the guide means is not moving in response to the instruction from the first control unit, an error can be notified.

When the guide means does not move in response to the instruction from the first control unit, for example, the drive means may be out of order. Further, for example, it is conceivable that a foreign object exists on the passage through which the game medium passes, which prevents the guide means from moving to the guide position. In this modification, the manager of the game machine (for example, an employee of the game hall) can grasp the failure of the driving means and the presence of foreign matter on the passage through which the game medium passes by notifying the error, and thus these deficiencies. Can be dealt with early.

[Template generation process]
Whether the object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on whether the image data obtained by the gaming medium detecting means capturing the object passing through the passage and the template data match or are similar to a certain degree. When determining whether or not, if a template generation means for generating template data is provided, it is possible to prevent template data from being generated based on fraudulent medals mixed in the majority of regular medals. Is desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned third problem, and a third object of the present invention is to generate a template based on fraudulent medals mixed in the majority of regular medals. The purpose is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the loss.

In order to solve the above-mentioned third problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

A slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal slot 21) and
A game machine including a game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201) for detecting a game medium inserted from the slot.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, an imaging means for imaging the passage (for example, a camera unit 209), and a passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210).
A game medium determination means (for example, a color recognition circuit 247 of a control LSI 234 and a color recognition circuit 247) that performs a determination process for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on the image data captured by the imaging means. Image recognition DSP circuit 242) and
It has template generation means (for example, color recognition circuit 247 of control LSI 234 and image recognition accelerator circuit 249) for generating template data used for determination processing.
The game medium determination means determines whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on whether the image data and the template data match or are similar to a certain degree. And
The template generation means groups a plurality of the image data into a group of the image data that is the same or similar to a predetermined degree, and the group in the higher predetermined order in descending order of the number of the image data belonging to the same group. A gaming machine characterized in that template data is generated based on the image data belonging to each of the groups for each of the groups to which the number of the image data belongs is a predetermined number or more.

Further, when the template generation means cannot generate the group in which the number of image data is equal to or greater than the predetermined number before the number of game media input from the input port exceeds a specific number (for example, 259). May include a template abnormality notification means (for example, a control LSI 234) for notifying a template abnormality.

Further, the template generation means is
When the number of game media input from the slot is the first specified number (for example, 127), the number of the groups whose number of image data is equal to or greater than the predetermined number is the number of the first group (for example, 1). Or in the case of 2), or when the game medium input from the input port is the second specified number (for example, 259), the number of the group in which the number of the image data is equal to or greater than the predetermined number is the second. When the number of groups is 2 (for example, 1 to 4), the template data may be generated.

In the third gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, template data is not generated based on a group in which the number of data belonging to the third game machine is less than a predetermined number. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the generation of template data based on the fraudulent medals mixed in the majority of regular medals.

[FFT engraving judgment]
Conventionally, two proximity sensors for detecting medals are provided in the medal passage, and it is determined whether or not a medal for a game has passed through the medal passage based on the output of each proximity sensor. There is a known slot machine that detects fraudulent activity in which is used (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-342814). Further, there is known a slot machine that uses a CCD camera to determine an inappropriate medal (illegal medal) that has been inserted (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271462).
A fourth object of the present invention is to improve the accuracy of detecting fraudulent acts that cause the user to misunderstand that a legitimate game medium is used.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides a fourth gaming machine or gaming device having the following configuration.

An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
An imaging means for imaging the passage (for example, a camera unit 209 described later) and
It has a game medium determination means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on image data obtained via the image pickup means. ,
The game medium determination means is
A first image conversion means (for example, an ISP circuit 245 that performs a color conversion process described later) that converts the image data into a first image data that is orthogonal coordinate image data and is a grayscale image.
A second image conversion means for converting the first image data into a second image data which is polar coordinate image data (for example, an image recognition accelerator circuit 249 that performs a polar coordinate conversion process described later).
A third image conversion means (for example, an image recognition accelerator circuit 249 that performs an FFT conversion process described later) that Fourier transforms the second image data in predetermined angle units and converts it into the third image data.
It has a comparison result deriving means (for example, an image recognition DSP circuit 242 that performs FFT template comparison processing described later) for comparing the template data generated in advance with the third image data and deriving the comparison result.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium based on the comparison result.

Equipped with a game medium detection means for detecting a game medium,
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
An imaging means for imaging the passage and
Based on the image data obtained via the imaging means, the game medium determining means for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium is provided.
The game medium determination means is
A first image conversion means for converting the image data into first image data which is orthogonal coordinate image data and is a grayscale image.
A second image conversion means for converting the first image data into a second image data which is polar coordinate image data, and
A third image conversion means for Fourier transforming the second image data in predetermined angle units and converting it into the third image data
It has a comparison result deriving means for comparing the template data generated in advance with the third image data and deriving the comparison result.
A gaming device, characterized in that it determines whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium based on the comparison result.

In the fourth gaming machine or gaming device of the present invention having the above configuration, not only the comparison of the entire image but also the individual comparison in units of angles can be easily performed, so that it is misunderstood that a regular gaming medium is used. Increases the accuracy of fraud detection.

[3D judgment]
Further, in order to achieve the fourth object, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine or gaming device having the following configuration.

An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
An imaging means for imaging the passage (for example, a camera unit 209 described later) and
It has a game medium determination means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on image data obtained via the image pickup means. ,
The game medium determination means is
The image data is converted into different first image data (for example, gradient average image data described later), second image data (for example, HOG data described later), and third image data (for example, FFT data described later). Image conversion means (for example, image recognition accelerator circuit 249 described later) and
A first comparison result deriving means (for example, an image recognition DSP circuit 242 that performs a gradient average image template comparison process described later) that compares the first template data generated in advance with the first image data and derives the first comparison result. )When,
With a second comparison result deriving means (for example, an image recognition DSP circuit 242 that performs a HOG template comparison process described later) that compares the second template data generated in advance with the second image data and derives the second comparison result. ,
With a third comparison result deriving means (for example, an image recognition DSP circuit 242 that performs FFT template comparison processing described later) that compares the third template data generated in advance with the third image data and derives the third comparison result. Have,
Based on the first comparison result, the second comparison result, the third comparison result, and a preset determination threshold value, it is determined whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular game medium. A game machine featuring.

Equipped with a game medium detection means for detecting a game medium,
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
An imaging means for imaging the passage and
Based on the image data obtained via the imaging means, the game medium determining means for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium is provided.
The game medium determination means is
An image conversion means for converting the image data into different first image data, second image data, and third image data, and
A first comparison result deriving means that compares the first template data generated in advance with the first image data and derives the first comparison result.
A second comparison result deriving means for comparing the second template data generated in advance with the second image data and deriving the second comparison result,
It has a third comparison result deriving means for comparing the third template data generated in advance with the third image data and deriving the third comparison result.
Based on the first comparison result, the second comparison result, the third comparison result, and a preset determination threshold value, it is determined whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular game medium. A gaming device characterized by.

Further, the first image data is gradient average image data obtained by rotating the image data and accumulating, and the second image data is HOG data obtained by converting the image data into HOG (Histograms of Oriented Gradients). The third image data may be Fourier transformed data obtained by Fourier transforming the image data.

According to the sixth gaming machine or gaming device of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to determine the marking on one determination target based on the results of three different types of template comparison processing. Therefore, the accuracy of the determination is improved, and the accuracy of the detection of fraudulent acts that misleads the user to misunderstand that a legitimate game medium is used is improved.

[Coefficient update processing]
Further, in order to achieve the fourth object, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine or gaming device having the following configuration.

An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
An imaging means for imaging the passage (for example, a camera unit 209 described later) and
It has a game medium determination means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on image data obtained via the image pickup means. ,
The game medium determination means is
The image data is converted into different first image data (for example, gradient average image data described later), second image data (for example, HOG data described later), and third image data (for example, FFT data described later). Image conversion means (for example, image recognition accelerator circuit 249 described later) and
A first comparison result deriving means (for example, an image recognition DSP circuit 242 that performs a gradient average image template comparison process described later) that compares the first template data generated in advance with the first image data and derives the first comparison result. )When,
With a second comparison result deriving means (for example, an image recognition DSP circuit 242 that performs a HOG template comparison process described later) that compares the second template data generated in advance with the second image data and derives the second comparison result. ,
With a third comparison result deriving means (for example, an image recognition DSP circuit 242 that performs FFT template comparison processing described later) that compares the third template data generated in advance with the third image data and derives the third comparison result. Have,
Based on the first comparison result, the second comparison result, the third comparison result, and a preset determination threshold value (for example, a coefficient D described later), the object passing through the passage is a regular game medium. Determine if there is,
A gaming machine characterized in that the determination threshold value is updated based on the average and deviation of the first comparison result, the second comparison result, and the third comparison result, respectively.

Equipped with a game medium detection means for detecting a game medium,
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
An imaging means for imaging the passage and
Based on the image data obtained via the imaging means, the game medium determining means for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium is provided.
The game medium determination means is
An image conversion means for converting the image data into different first image data, second image data, and third image data, and
A first comparison result deriving means that compares the first template data generated in advance with the first image data and derives the first comparison result.
A second comparison result deriving means for comparing the second template data generated in advance with the second image data and deriving the second comparison result,
It has a third comparison result deriving means for comparing the third template data generated in advance with the third image data and deriving the third comparison result.
Based on the first comparison result, the second comparison result, the third comparison result, and a preset determination threshold value, it is determined whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular game medium.
A gaming device characterized in that the determination threshold value is updated based on the average and deviation of the first comparison result, the second comparison result, and the third comparison result, respectively.

Further, the game medium determination means may update the determination threshold when it determines that the object passing through the passage is a regular game medium a predetermined number of times.

According to the seventh gaming machine or gaming device of the present invention having the above configuration, even if the marking changes due to aged deterioration or the like, various types including a threshold used for determination according to the current state of the regular medal. The coefficient can be updated. Therefore, the accuracy of the results of various determinations can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the accuracy of detecting fraudulent acts that cause the user to misunderstand that a legitimate game medium is being used.

[Template update process]
In order to achieve the fourth object, the present invention provides a seventh gaming machine or gaming device having the following configuration.

An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
An imaging means for imaging the passage (for example, a camera unit 209 described later) and
It has a game medium determination means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on image data obtained via the image pickup means. ,
The game medium determination means is
The image data is converted into different first image data (for example, gradient average image data described later), second image data (for example, HOG data described later), and third image data (for example, FFT data described later). Image conversion means (for example, image recognition accelerator circuit 249 described later) and
A template generation means for generating the first template data, the second template data, and the third template data corresponding to the first image data, the second image data, and the third image data, respectively.
A first comparison result deriving means (for example, an image recognition DSP circuit 242 that performs a gradient average image template comparison process described later) that compares the first template data with the first image data and derives the first comparison result.
A second comparison result deriving means (for example, an image recognition DSP circuit 242 that performs a HOG template comparison process described later) that compares the second template data with the second image data and derives the second comparison result.
It has a third comparison result deriving means (for example, an image recognition DSP circuit 242 that performs FFT template comparison processing described later) that compares the third template data with the third image data and derives the third comparison result. And
Based on the first comparison result, the second comparison result, the third comparison result, and a preset determination threshold value (for example, a coefficient D described later), the object passing through the passage is a regular game medium. Determine if there is,
The template generation means includes the first image data, the second image data, the third image data, the first template data, the second template data, and the above, which are related to the game medium determined to be a regular game medium. A gaming machine characterized in that a template update process for synthesizing a third template data is performed.

Equipped with a game medium detection means
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
An imaging means for imaging the passage and
Based on the image data obtained via the imaging means, the game medium determining means for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium is provided.
The game medium determination means is
An image conversion means for converting the image data into different first image data, second image data, and third image data, and
A template generation means for generating the first template data, the second template data, and the third template data corresponding to the first image data, the second image data, and the third image data, respectively.
A first comparison result deriving means for comparing the first template data with the first image data and deriving the first comparison result.
A second comparison result deriving means for comparing the second template data with the second image data and deriving the second comparison result,
It has a third comparison result deriving means for comparing the third template data with the third image data and deriving the third comparison result.
Based on the first comparison result, the second comparison result, the third comparison result, and a preset determination threshold value, it is determined whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular game medium.
The template generation means includes the first image data, the second image data, the third image data, the first template data, the second template data, and the above, which are related to the game medium determined to be a regular game medium. A gaming device characterized in that a template update process for synthesizing a third template data is performed.

Further, the template generation means obtains the first image data relating to the game medium determined to be the regular game medium each time the number of the game media determined to be the regular game medium by the game medium determination means reaches a predetermined number. A template update process is performed in which each of the second image data and the third image data is weighted and averaged, and each of the weighted averages is combined with the first template data, the second template data, and the third template data. You may go.

According to the seventh gaming machine or gaming device of the present invention having the above configuration, the template is sequentially updated. For this reason, the template can be updated according to the current state of the regular medal even if the engraving becomes less noticeable than the initial one due to deterioration due to, for example, putting it into a game machine, paying it out, or cleaning it at a game store. Therefore, the accuracy of the results of various determinations can be maintained. Therefore, the accuracy of detecting fraudulent activity that causes the user to misunderstand that a legitimate game medium is used is improved.

[Cover open detection]
Conventionally, there is known a slot machine that uses a CCD camera to determine an inappropriate medal (illegal medal) that has been inserted (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271462).
However, in the above slot machine, when unnecessary light hits the part imaged by the CCD camera of the medal selector, the inserted medal or the CCD camera itself, whether or not the inserted medal is a regular medal based on the captured image. There is a risk that the accuracy of the determination will decrease. Further, for that purpose, if a sensor or the like for detecting unnecessary light is provided, the number of parts of the medal selector increases and the manufacturing cost increases.
A fifth object of the present invention is to provide a game machine or a game device capable of suppressing the manufacturing cost and preventing the accuracy of determining whether or not the medal is a regular medal from being lowered.
In order to achieve the fifth object, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine or gaming device having the following configuration.

An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
An imaging means for imaging the passage (for example, a camera unit 209 described later) and
A game medium determination means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on image data obtained via the image pickup means.
The presence or absence of the game medium is determined for the plurality of passage determination regions preset in the image data, and the change mode of the presence or absence of the game medium in the plurality of passage determination regions in the plurality of image data that are continuous in time series is determined. It has a counting means (for example, a medal counting circuit 246 described later) that counts a game medium when it matches a predetermined aspect.
At a predetermined position of the game medium detecting means, a light-shielding means (for example, a cover member 240 described later) that blocks light unnecessary for the determination of the game medium determining means is arranged.
The counting means has a light-shielding determination means for determining whether or not the light-shielding means is arranged at a predetermined position.
When the light-shielding determination means detects a change in the brightness of the predetermined passage determination region for a predetermined time or longer, the light-shielding determination means detects an abnormality in which the light-shielding means is not arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a cover open detection process described later). )
A game machine characterized by that.

Equipped with a game medium detection means
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
An imaging means for imaging the passage and
A game medium determination means for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on image data obtained via the image pickup means.
The presence or absence of the game medium is determined for the plurality of passage determination regions preset in the image data, and the change mode of the presence or absence of the game medium in the plurality of passage determination regions in the plurality of image data continuously connected in time It has a counting means for counting a game medium when it matches a predetermined aspect, and has.
At a predetermined position of the game medium detecting means, a shading means for blocking light unnecessary for the determination of the game medium determining means is arranged.
The counting means has a light-shielding determination means for determining whether or not the light-shielding means is arranged at a predetermined position.
The light-shielding determination means is a gaming device characterized in that when a change in brightness of a predetermined passage determination region is detected for a predetermined time or longer, the light-shielding means detects an abnormality in which the light-shielding means is not arranged at a predetermined position.

According to the eighth gaming machine or gaming device of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the accuracy of determining whether or not the medal is a regular medal from being lowered without increasing the manufacturing cost. That is, since it is possible to prevent the determination from being exposed to unnecessary light, the accuracy of the determination result can be maintained. Therefore, the accuracy of detecting fraudulent activity that causes the user to misunderstand that a legitimate game medium is used is improved.
Further, since it is determined whether or not the shading means is arranged at a predetermined position based on the image data obtained via the imaging means, it is not necessary to attach another sensor for the determination. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Further, since the judgment is based on the image data, the conditions for the judgment can be easily changed as compared with the case where a dedicated sensor is provided.

By the way, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271462 describes a slot machine that uses a CCD camera to determine an inappropriate medal (illegal medal) that has been inserted. In addition, this slot machine notifies an error when the stored amount of inappropriate medals (illegal medals) reaches a predetermined amount.
However, there is a demand for a gaming machine capable of notifying that the number of inserted fraudulent medals exceeds a predetermined amount more efficiently than the slot machine described in the above publication.
A sixth object of the present invention is to efficiently provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of notifying that the number of inserted fraudulent medals exceeds a predetermined amount.
In order to achieve the sixth object, a game machine and a game device having the following configurations are provided.

Control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101 described later) and
Display means for displaying various images (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
Passing object detecting means (for example, camera unit 209 described later) for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
Based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means, a game medium determining means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium, and
It has a determination result output means for outputting the determination result of the game medium determination means to the control means.
The control means
A storage unit (for example, a sub-RAM 103 described later) having a determination result storage area (for example, a queue described later) for storing a predetermined storable number of the determination results output from the determination result output means.
When the latest determination result is stored in the determination result storage area, if the determination result of the storable number is stored in the determination result storage area, the determination stored in the determination result storage area. It has a determination result storage means that outputs the oldest determination result among the results from the determination result storage area and stores the latest determination result.
When the determination result storage means outputs the oldest determination result, it is said that the game medium is not a regular game medium included in the memorable number of the determination results stored in the determination result storage area. It is determined whether or not the number of determination results is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and when it is determined that the number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the display means notifies the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, steps S152 to S155 of processing at the time of receiving a determination completion command described later).
A game machine characterized by that.

Control means and
A game medium detection means for detecting a game medium and
With
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
Passing object detecting means for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
Based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means, a game medium determining means for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium, and
It has a determination result output means for outputting the determination result of the game medium determination means to the control means.
The control means
A storage unit having a determination result storage area for storing a predetermined storable number of the determination results output from the determination result output means, and a storage unit.
When the latest determination result is stored in the determination result storage area, if the determination result of the storable number is stored in the determination result storage area, the determination stored in the determination result storage area. It has a determination result storage means that outputs the oldest determination result among the results from the determination result storage area and stores the latest determination result.
When the determination result storage means outputs the oldest determination result, it is said that the game medium is not a regular game medium included in the memorable number of the determination results stored in the determination result storage area. A gaming device characterized in that it determines whether the number of determination results is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and notifies the occurrence of an abnormality when the determination is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number.

The gaming machine or gaming device having the above configuration can efficiently notify that the number of illegal medals inserted has exceeded a predetermined amount.

By the way, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271462 describes a slot machine that uses a CCD camera to determine an inappropriate medal (illegal medal) that has been inserted.
However, the slot machine described in the above publication cannot recognize the occurrence of fraudulent acts performed outside the imaging range of the CCD camera (imaging means) or fraudulent acts that cannot be determined by image processing.
A seventh object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing the occurrence of fraudulent acts performed outside the imaging range of the imaging means or fraudulent acts that cannot be determined by image processing.
In order to achieve the seventh object, a game machine having the following configuration is provided.

Display means for displaying various images (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
With the first control means (for example, the main control circuit 91 described later),
With the second control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101 described later),
An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
An imaging means for imaging the passage (for example, a camera unit 209 described later) and
A game medium determination means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on image data obtained via the image pickup means.
A determination result output means that outputs the determination result of the game medium determination means to the second control means, and
An object detection means (for example, a double photo sensor 502 described later) for detecting that an object has passed through the passage, and
It has a detection result output means for outputting the detection result of the object detection means to the first control means.
The first control means has a detection result transmitting means for transmitting the detection result output from the detection result output means to the second control means.
The second control means
A determination result counting means that counts the number of the game media based on the determination result received from the determination result output means, and a determination result counting means.
It has a detection result counting means that counts the number of the game media based on the detection result transmitted from the detection result transmitting means.
When the difference between the number counted by the determination result counting means and the number counted by the detection result counting means is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the display means notifies the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, when receiving a medal insertion command described later). Processing steps S214, S215)
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of fraudulent acts performed outside the imaging range of the imaging means and fraudulent acts that cannot be determined by image processing.

By the way, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271462 describes a slot machine that uses a CCD camera to determine an inappropriate medal (illegal medal) that has been inserted.
However, the slot machines described in the above publication could not recognize the occurrence of fraudulent acts (so-called Clemangoto) that increase credits without actually inserting medals into the medal slot.
An eighth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of recognizing the occurrence of fraudulent acts that increase credits without inserting medals into the medal slot.
In order to achieve the eighth object, a game machine having the following configuration is provided.

Display means for displaying various images (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
With the first control means (for example, the main control circuit 91 described later),
With the second control means (for example, the sub-control circuit 101 described later),
An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the slot, and
A storage means for storing the input game medium (for example, a hopper device 51 described later) and
It is provided with a return storage means (for example, a medal tray unit 34 described later) for returning the inserted game medium to the player and storing the game medium.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
Passing object detecting means (for example, camera unit 209 described later) for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
Based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means, a game medium determining means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium, and
A determination result output means that outputs the determination result of the game medium determination means to the second control means, and
Either the storage means or the return storage means has a conversion means (for example, a medal solenoid 208 described later) for converting a route for guiding the game medium.
The first control means
A conversion control means for controlling the conversion means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) and
It has a control state transmitting means (for example, a main CPU 93 described later) that transmits a control state controlled by the conversion control means to the second control means.
The second control means
A counting means (for example, a sub CPU 102 described later) that counts the number of determination results that are determined to be a regular game medium among the determination results output from the determination result output means.
When the control state transmitted from the control state transmitting means is controlled by the storage means and the number counted by the counting means exceeds a predetermined number, the display means notifies the abnormality (for example, , A gaming machine characterized by having a sub CPU 102) that performs steps S157, S159, and S160 of processing at the time of receiving a determination completion command, which will be described later.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to recognize the occurrence of fraudulent acts that increase credits without inserting medals into the medal slot.

By the way, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271462 describes a slot machine that uses a CCD camera to determine an inappropriate medal (illegal medal) that has been inserted.
In a game machine such as the slot machine described in the above publication, for fraudulent acts related to an imaging unit equipped with a CCD camera, restart (reboot) one of the imaging unit and various units connected to the imaging unit. There is fraudulent activity involved. However, it has been difficult for the slot machines described in the above publication to recognize fraudulent activities involving restarts.
A ninth object of the present invention is to provide a game machine and a game device capable of recognizing a fraudulent act accompanied by a restart.
In order to achieve the ninth object, a game machine and a game device having the following configurations are provided.

Display means for displaying various images (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
Control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101 described later) and
An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
Passing object detecting means (for example, camera unit 209 described later) for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
Based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means, a game medium determining means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium, and
A first activation number storage means (for example, SRAM 243 described later) that stores a first number of times that the game medium detection means is activated, and
It has a transmission means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) that transmits the first number of times stored by the first activation number storage means to the control means.
The control means
It has a second activation number storage means (for example, a sub RAM 103 described later) that stores a second number of activations of the control means.
When the difference between the first number of times transmitted by the transmitting means and the second number of times stored by the second activation number storage means exceeds a threshold value, the display means notifies the occurrence of an abnormality ( For example, the sub CPU 102 that performs steps S192 and S193 of the activation count determination process described later).
A game machine characterized by that.

Control means and
A game medium detection means for detecting a game medium is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
Passing object detecting means for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
Based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means, a game medium determining means for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium, and
The first activation number storage means for storing the first number of times the game medium detection means is activated, and the first activation number storage means.
It has a transmission means for transmitting the first number of times stored by the first activation number storage means to the control means.
The control means
It has a second activation number storage means for storing a second number of times the control means is activated.
It is characterized in that when the difference between the first number of times transmitted by the transmitting means and the second number of times stored by the second activation number storage means exceeds a threshold value, the occurrence of an abnormality is notified. Amusement device.

According to the game machine and the game device having the above configuration, it is possible to recognize a fraudulent act involving restart.

In Toroko, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271462 describes a slot machine that uses a CCD camera to determine an inappropriate medal (illegal medal) that has been inserted.
In a game machine such as a slot machine described in the above publication, a fraudulent act relating to an image pickup unit including a CCD camera includes a fraudulent act involving an initialization process which is a process of resetting various settings of the image pickup unit. However, it has been difficult for the slot machines described in the above publication to recognize fraudulent activities involving initialization processing.
A tenth object of the present invention is to provide a game machine and a game device capable of recognizing fraudulent acts involving initialization processing.
In order to achieve the tenth object, a game machine and a game device having the following configurations are provided.

Display means for displaying various images (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
Control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101 described later) and
An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
Passing object detecting means (for example, camera unit 209 described later) for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
Based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means, a game medium determining means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium, and
A medium storage means (for example, SRAM 243 described later) that can store information under the control of the game medium determination means.
It has an initialization operation means (for example, an initialization switch described later) that performs an operation for initializing a predetermined area of the medium storage means.
The medium storage means has an initialization information storage area and has an initialization information storage area.
The game medium determination means is
Initialization processing of a predetermined area of the medium storage means is performed based on the operation of the initialization operation means, and initialization information indicating that the initialization processing has been performed is provided to the medium storage means. Initialization processing means stored in the initialization information storage area and
A first transmission means (for example, a control LSI 234 that transmits a start-up completion command described later) that transmits information including the initialization information stored in the initialization information storage area of the medium storage means to the control means.
A control for transmitting a second transmission means (for example, a medal selector non-operation command described later) for transmitting information including the initialization information stored in the initialization information storage area of the medium storage means to the control means at startup. LSI234) and
When the information received from the first transmission means or the second transmission means includes the initialization information, the control means can initialize a predetermined area in the medium storage means by the display means. Notify that it has been performed (for example, the sub CPU 102 that performs step S143 of processing when receiving a start completion command and step S182 of processing when receiving a medal selector no operation command, which will be described later).
A game machine characterized by that.

Control means and
A slot for inserting game media and
A game medium detection means for detecting a game medium is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
Passing object detecting means for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
Based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means, a game medium determining means for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium, and
A medium storage means that can store information under the control of the game medium determination means,
It has an initialization operation means for performing an operation for initializing a predetermined area of the medium storage means.
The medium storage means has an initialization information storage area and has an initialization information storage area.
The game medium determination means is
Initialization processing of a predetermined area of the medium storage means is performed based on the operation of the initialization operation means, and initialization information indicating that the initialization processing has been performed is provided to the medium storage means. Initialization processing means stored in the initialization information storage area and
A first transmission means for transmitting information including the initialization information stored in the initialization information storage area of the medium storage means to the control means, and
It has a second transmission means for transmitting information including the initialization information stored in the initialization information storage area of the medium storage means to the control means at the time of activation.
When the information received from the first transmission means or the second transmission means includes the initialization information, the control means has initialized a predetermined area in the medium storage means. A gaming device characterized by notifying.

According to the gaming machine and the gaming device having the above configuration, it is possible to recognize fraudulent acts involving initialization processing.

By the way, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271462 describes a slot machine that uses a CCD camera to determine an inappropriate medal (illegal medal) that has been inserted.

In a game machine such as the slot machine described in the above publication, fraudulent acts related to an imaging unit equipped with a CCD camera include fraudulent acts involving unauthorized operation of a switch for enabling / disabling various settings related to the imaging unit. .. However, it has been difficult for the slot machines described in the above publication to recognize fraudulent activities involving such fraudulent operations.
An eleventh object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device capable of recognizing fraudulent acts accompanied by fraudulent operations of switches for switching between valid and invalid of various settings.
In order to achieve the eleventh object, a game machine and a game device having the following configurations are provided.

Display means for displaying various images (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
Control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101 described later) and
An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
Passing object detecting means (for example, camera unit 209 described later) for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
Based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means, a game medium determining means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium, and
A selection means (for example, a color determination switch and a marking determination switch described later) for selecting valid or invalid determination of the game medium determination means, and
It has a state transmitting means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for transmitting the selected state of the selecting means to the control means.
The control means
A first state storage means (for example, a first switch information storage area described later) that stores the selected state of the selection means at the time of the previous power-on, and
Selection state comparison means (for example, processing at the time of receiving an activation completion command described later) that compares the selected state stored in the first state storage means with the selected state received from the state transmitting means and determines whether they match. Sub CPU 102) that performs step S145 of the above, and
When the selection state comparison means determines that the selection state stored in the first state storage means does not match the selection state received from the state transmission means, the display means notifies the determination result. (For example, the sub CPU 102 that performs step S146 of the processing at the time of receiving the start completion command described later).
A game machine characterized by that.

Control means and
A game medium detection means for detecting a game medium is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
Passing object detecting means for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
Based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means, a game medium determining means for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium, and
A selection means for selecting valid or invalid determination of the game medium determination means, and
It has a state transmitting means for transmitting the selected state of the selecting means to the control means.
The control means
A first state storage means for storing the selected state of the selection means at the time of the previous power-on, and
A selection state comparison means for comparing the selection state stored in the first state storage means with the selection state received from the state transmission means and determining whether or not they match is provided.
When it is determined by the selection state comparison means that the selection state stored in the first state storage means does not match the selection state received from the state transmission means, the determination result is notified. A game device to be used.

According to the gaming machine and the gaming device having the above configuration, it is possible to recognize fraudulent acts associated with illegally operating a switch for switching between valid and invalid of various settings.

By the way, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271462 describes a slot machine that uses a CCD camera to determine an inappropriate medal (illegal medal) that has been inserted.
In a game machine such as the slot machine described in the above publication, for fraudulent acts related to an imaging unit equipped with a CCD camera, restart (reboot) one of the imaging unit and various units connected to the imaging unit. There is fraudulent activity involved. However, it has been difficult for the slot machines described in the above publication to recognize fraudulent activities involving restarts.
A twelfth object of the present invention is to provide a game machine and a game device capable of recognizing a fraudulent act accompanied by a restart.
In order to achieve the twelfth object, a game machine and a game device having the following configurations are provided.

Display means for displaying various images (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
Control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101 described later) and
An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
Passing object detecting means (for example, camera unit 209 described later) for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
A game medium determination means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a regular game medium based on data obtained via the passing object detection means is provided. ,
The game medium determination means is
A command transmission means for transmitting various commands to the control means, and
It has a transmission command number counting means for cumulatively counting the number of commands transmitted to the control means after activation.
The various commands include an ACK command indicating that the command was normally received when a predetermined command was received from the control means.
The command transmitting means transmits the various commands transmitted to the control means, including count information indicating the value of the count cumulatively counted by the transmission command number counting means.
The control means
A count information storage means (for example, a sub-RAM 103 described later) for storing the count information included in the various received commands, and
The value obtained by adding 1 to the count information included in the previously received count information stored by the count information storage means and the value indicated by the count information included in the various commands received this time match. It has a determination means (for example, sub CPU 102 described later) for determining whether or not to perform
A gaming machine characterized in that when it is determined that the determination means do not match, an abnormality is notified by the display means.

Control means and
A game medium detection means for detecting a game medium is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
Passing object detecting means for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
A game medium determining means for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a legitimate game medium based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means is provided.
The game medium determination means is
A command transmission means for transmitting various commands to the control means, and
It has a transmission command number counting means for cumulatively counting the number of commands transmitted to the control means after activation.
The various commands include an ACK command indicating that the command was normally received when a predetermined command was received from the control means.
The command transmitting means transmits the various commands transmitted to the control means, including count information indicating the value of the count cumulatively counted by the transmission command number counting means.
The control means
A count information storage means for storing the count information included in the various received commands, and a count information storage means.
The value obtained by adding 1 to the count information included in the previously received count information stored by the count information storage means and the value indicated by the count information included in the various commands received this time match. It has a determination means for determining whether or not to do so, and has
A gaming device characterized in that when it is determined that the determination means do not match, an abnormality is notified.

According to the game machine and the game device having the above configuration, it is possible to recognize a fraudulent act involving restart.

By the way, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271462 describes a slot machine that uses a CCD camera to determine an inappropriate medal (illegal medal) that has been inserted.
In a game machine such as the slot machine described in the above publication, when an error occurs in an imaging unit equipped with a CCD camera, that is, a unit for determining whether or not the inserted medal is a regular medal, the error is surely detected. It is desired to recognize.
A thirteenth object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine and a gaming device that can reliably recognize an error that has occurred in a unit that determines whether or not a inserted medal is a regular medal.
In order to achieve the thirteenth object, a game machine and a game device having the following configurations are provided.

Display means for displaying various images (for example, a liquid crystal display device 11 described later) and
Control means (for example, sub-control circuit 101 described later) and
An insertion slot for inserting a game medium (for example, a medal insertion slot 21 described later) and
A game medium detecting means (for example, a medal selector 201 described later) for detecting a game medium inserted from the insertion slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion (for example, a medal rail 210 described later) forming a passage through which the game medium passes, and
Passing object detecting means (for example, camera unit 209 described later) for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
Based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means, a game medium determining means (for example, a control LSI 234 described later) for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium, and
A medium storage means (for example, SRAM 243 described later) that is controlled by the game medium determination means and can store information is provided.
The game medium determination means is
An abnormality detecting means that detects an abnormality of the game medium detecting means and stores the detected abnormality information indicating the abnormality in the medium storage means.
With the first transmission means (for example, the control LSI 234 that transmits the medal selector error command described later) that transmits the abnormality information stored in the medium storage means to the control means based on the abnormality detection means detecting the abnormality. ,
It has a second transmission means (for example, a control LSI 234 that transmits a medal selector non-operation command described later) that transmits abnormal information stored in the medium storage means to the control means at a predetermined cycle.
The control means
An abnormality information receiving means (for example, a sub CPU 102 described later) for receiving the abnormality information transmitted from the first transmitting means or the second transmitting means, and
It has a release information transmitting means (for example, a sub CPU 102 described later) that transmits an abnormality release information to the game medium detection means when a predetermined operation is performed.
When the abnormality information is received, the display means performs a suggestion notification suggesting the cancellation of the abnormality (for example, display of the C1 error screen described later).
After receiving the release information, the game medium determining means deletes the abnormality information stored in the medium storage means when the abnormality detected by the abnormality detecting means cannot be detected. Machine.

Control means and
A game medium detection means for detecting a game medium is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
Passing object detecting means for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
Based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means, a game medium determining means for determining whether or not the object passing through the passage is a regular gaming medium, and
A medium storage means that can store information under the control of the game medium determination means.
The game medium determination means is
An abnormality detecting means that detects an abnormality of the game medium detecting means and stores the detected abnormality information indicating the abnormality in the medium storage means.
A first transmission means for transmitting the abnormality information stored in the medium storage means to the control means based on the abnormality detection means detecting the abnormality.
It has a second transmission means for transmitting the abnormality information stored in the medium storage means to the control means at a predetermined cycle.
The control means
Anomalous information receiving means for receiving anomalous information transmitted from the first transmitting means or the second transmitting means, and
It has a release information transmitting means for transmitting the abnormality release information to the game medium detecting means when a predetermined operation is performed.
When the abnormality information is received, a suggestion notification suggesting the cancellation of the abnormality is performed.
After receiving the release information, the game medium determining means deletes the abnormality information stored in the medium storage means when the abnormality detected by the abnormality detecting means cannot be detected. Equipment.

According to the gaming machine and the gaming device having the above configuration, it is possible to reliably recognize an error that has occurred in the unit that determines whether or not the inserted medal is a regular medal.

1 ... Pachislot, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 21 ... Medal slot, 23 ... Start lever, 32 ... Medal payout exit, 51 ... Hopper device, 71 ... Main Control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 79 ... Start switch, 80 ... Stop switch board, 91 ... Main control circuit, 101 ... Sub control circuit, 140 ... Cancel shooter, 201 ... Medal selector, 202 ... Medal shoot, 203 ... Slope , 204 ... base plate, 205 ... sub-plate, 206 ... cancel shooter, 207 ... select plate, 208 ... medal solenoid, 209 ... camera unit, 210 ... medal rail, 211 ... medal entrance, 212 ... central hole, 213 ... Medal pressure, 217 ... Magnet, 218 ... After medal pressure, 227 ... Medal stopper, 230 ... First board, 231 ... Second board, 232 ... CMOS image sensor, 233 ... LED, 234 ... Control LSI, 235 ... Legs, 241 ... Host controller, 242 ... Image recognition DSP circuit, 243 ... SRAM, 244 ... Flash memory, 245 ... ISP circuit, 246 ... Medal count circuit, 247 ... Color recognition circuit, 248 ... Fisheye correction scaler circuit, 249 … Image recognition accelerator circuit, 250… GPIO, 251… ISI circuit

Claims (2)

Display means for displaying various images and
Control means and
A slot for inserting game media and
A game medium detecting means for detecting a game medium thrown in from the slot is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
Passing object detecting means for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
A game medium determining means for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a legitimate game medium based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means is provided.
The game medium determination means is
A command transmission means for transmitting various commands to the control means, and
It has a transmission command number counting means for cumulatively counting the number of commands transmitted to the control means after activation.
The various commands include an ACK command indicating that the command was normally received when a predetermined command was received from the control means.
The command transmitting means transmits the various commands transmitted to the control means, including count information indicating the value of the count cumulatively counted by the transmission command number counting means.
The control means
A count information storage means for storing the count information included in the various received commands, and a count information storage means.
The value obtained by adding 1 to the count information included in the previously received count information stored by the count information storage means and the value indicated by the count information included in the various commands received this time match. It has a determination means for determining whether or not to do so, and has
A gaming machine characterized in that when it is determined that the determination means do not match, an abnormality is notified by the display means. Control means and
A game medium detection means for detecting a game medium is provided.
The game medium detecting means is
A passage forming portion that forms a passage through which the game medium passes, and a passage forming portion.
Passing object detecting means for detecting an object passing through the passage, and
A game medium determining means for determining whether or not an object passing through the passage is a legitimate game medium based on the data obtained via the passing object detecting means is provided.
The game medium determination means is
A command transmission means for transmitting various commands to the control means, and
It has a transmission command number counting means for cumulatively counting the number of commands transmitted to the control means after activation.
The various commands include an ACK command indicating that the command was normally received when a predetermined command was received from the control means.
The command transmitting means transmits the various commands transmitted to the control means, including count information indicating the value of the count cumulatively counted by the transmission command number counting means.
The control means
A count information storage means for storing the count information included in the various received commands, and a count information storage means.
The value obtained by adding 1 to the count information included in the previously received count information stored by the count information storage means and the value indicated by the count information included in the various commands received this time match. It has a determination means for determining whether or not to do so, and has
A gaming device characterized in that when it is determined that the determination means do not match, an abnormality is notified.

Images